Owner's Manual Bedienungsanleitung Mode d'emploi Manuale d

Owner's Manual Bedienungsanleitung Mode d'emploi Manuale d
Information
HONG KONG
BARBADOS
PERU
IRELAND
CYPRUS
Parsons Music Ltd.
8th Floor, Railway Plaza, 39
Chatham Road South, T.S.T,
Kowloon, HONG KONG
TEL: 2333 1863
A&B Music Supplies LTD
12 Webster Industrial Park
Wildey, St.Michael, Barbados
TEL: (246)430-1100
Audionet
Distribuciones Musicales SAC
Juan Fanning 530
Miraflores
Lima - Peru
TEL: (511) 4461388
Roland Ireland
G2 Calmount Park, Calmount
Avenue, Dublin 12
Republic of IRELAND
TEL: (01) 4294444
Radex Sound Equipment Ltd.
17, Diagorou Street, Nicosia,
CYPRUS
TEL: (022) 66-9426
EDIROL (Europe) Ltd.
Studio 3.4 114 Power Road
London W4 5PY
U. K.
TEL: +44 (0)20 8747 5949
FAX:+44 (0)20 8747 5948
http://www.edirol.com/europe
INDIA
Deutschland
TEL: 0700 33 47 65 20
France
TEL: 0810 000 371
Italia
TEL: 02 93778329
INDONESIA
U. S. A. / CANADA
EDIROL Corporation
North America
425 Sequoia Drive, Suite 114
Bellingham, WA 98226
U. S. A.
TEL: (360) 594-4273
FAX: (360) 594-4271
http://www.edirol.com/
Rivera Digitec (India) Pvt. Ltd.
409, Nirman Kendra
Mahalaxmi Flats Compound
Off. Dr. Edwin Moses Road,
Mumbai-400011, INDIA
TEL: (022) 2493 9051
PT Citra IntiRama
J1. Cideng Timur No. 15J-150
Jakarta Pusat
INDONESIA
TEL: (021) 6324170
KOREA
Cosmos Corporation
1461-9, Seocho-Dong,
Seocho Ku, Seoul, KOREA
TEL: (02) 3486-8855
MALAYSIA/
SINGAPORE
Roland Asia Pacific Sdn. Bhd.
45-1, Block C2, Jalan PJU 1/39,
Dataran Prima, 47301 Petaling
Jaya, Selangor, MALAYSIA
TEL: (03) 7805-3263
AFRICA
EGYPT
Al Fanny Trading Office
9, EBN Hagar A1 Askalany
Street,
ARD E1 Golf, Heliopolis,
Cairo 11341, EGYPT
TEL: 20-2-417-1828
REUNION
Maison FO - YAM Marcel
25 Rue Jules Hermann,
Chaudron - BP79 97 491
Ste Clotilde Cedex,
REUNION ISLAND
TEL: (0262) 218-429
SOUTH AFRICA
Paul Bothner(PTY)Ltd.
17 Werdmuller Centre,
Main Road, Claremont 7708
SOUTH AFRICA
TEL: (021) 674 4030
PHILIPPINES
G.A. Yupangco & Co. Inc.
339 Gil J. Puyat Avenue
Makati, Metro Manila 1200,
PHILIPPINES
TEL: (02) 899 9801
TAIWAN
ROLAND TAIWAN
ENTERPRISE CO., LTD.
Room 5, 9fl. No. 112 Chung
Shan N.Road Sec.2, Taipei,
TAIWAN, R.O.C.
TEL: (02) 2561 3339
THAILAND
Theera Music Co. , Ltd.
330 Verng NakornKasem, Soi
2, Bangkok 10100, THAILAND
TEL: (02) 2248821
VIETNAM
Saigon Music
Suite DP-8
40 Ba Huyen Thanh Quan
Street
Hochiminh City, VIETNAM
TEL: (08) 930-1969
ASIA
CHINA
Roland Shanghai Electronics
Co.,Ltd.
5F. No.1500 Pingliang Road
Shanghai 200090, CHINA
TEL: (021) 5580-0800
Roland Shanghai Electronics
Co.,Ltd.
(BEIJING OFFICE)
10F. No.18 3 Section Anhuaxili
Chaoyang District Beijing
100011 CHINA
TEL: (010) 6426-5050
Roland Shanghai Electronics
Co.,Ltd.
(GUANGZHOU OFFICE)
2/F., No.30 Si You Nan Er Jie
Yi Xiang, Wu Yang Xin Cheng,
Guangzhou 510600, CHINA
TEL: (020) 8736-0428
AUSTRALIA/
NEW ZEALAND
AUSTRALIA/
NEW ZEALAND
Roland Corporation
Australia Pty.,Ltd.
38 Campbell Avenue
Dee Why West. NSW 2099
AUSTRALIA
For Australia
Tel: (02) 9982 8266
For New Zealand
Tel: (09) 3098 715
CENTRAL/LATIN
AMERICA
ARGENTINA
Instrumentos Musicales S.A.
Av.Santa Fe 2055
(1123) Buenos Aires
ARGENTINA
TEL: (011) 4508-2700
BRAZIL
Roland Brasil Ltda.
Rua San Jose, 780 Sala B
Parque Industrial San Jose
Cotia - Sao Paulo - SP, BRAZIL
TEL: (011) 4615 5666
CHILE
Comercial Fancy II S.A.
Rut.: 96.919.420-1
Nataniel Cox #739, 4th Floor
Santiago - Centro, CHILE
TEL: (02) 688-9540
COLOMBIA
Centro Musical Ltda.
Cra 43 B No 25 A 41 Bododega 9
Medellin, Colombia
TEL: (574)3812529
CURACAO
Zeelandia Music Center Inc.
Orionweg 30
Curacao, Netherland Antilles
TEL:(305)5926866
TRINIDAD
AMR Ltd
Ground Floor
Maritime Plaza
Barataria Trinidad W.I.
TEL: (868)638 6385
URUGUAY
Todo Musica S.A.
Francisco Acuna de Figueroa 1771
C.P.: 11.800
Montevideo, URUGUAY
TEL: (02) 924-2335
VENEZUELA
Instrumentos Musicales
Allegro,C.A.
Av.las industrias edf.Guitar
import
#7 zona Industrial de Turumo
Caracas, Venezuela
TEL: (212) 244-1122
DOMINICAN REPUBLIC
Instrumentos Fernando Giraldez
Calle Proyecto Central No.3
Ens.La Esperilla
Santo Domingo,
Dominican Republic
TEL:(809) 683 0305
EUROPE
ITALY
Roland Italy S. p. A.
Viale delle Industrie 8,
20020 Arese, Milano, ITALY
TEL: (02) 937-78300
IRAN
MOCO INC.
No.41 Nike St., Dr.Shariyati Ave.,
Roberoye Cerahe Mirdamad
Tehran, IRAN
TEL: (021) 285-4169
NORWAY
ISRAEL
Roland Scandinavia Avd.
Kontor Norge
Lilleakerveien 2 Postboks 95
Lilleaker N-0216 Oslo
NORWAY
TEL: 2273 0074
Halilit P. Greenspoon & Sons
Ltd.
8 Retzif Ha’aliya Hashnya St.
Tel-Aviv-Yafo ISRAEL
TEL: (03) 6823666
POLAND
AMMAN Trading Agency
245 Prince Mohammad St.,
Amman 1118, JORDAN
TEL: (06) 464-1200
MX MUSIC SP.Z.O.O.
UL. Gibraltarska 4.
PL-03664 Warszawa POLAND
TEL: (022) 679 44 19
PORTUGAL
Roland Iberia, S.L.
Portugal Office
Cais das Pedras, 8/9-1 Dto
4050-465, Porto, PORTUGAL
TEL: 22 608 00 60
ROMANIA
JORDAN
KUWAIT
EASA HUSAIN AL-YOUSIFI
& SONS CO.
Abdullah Salem Street,
Safat, KUWAIT
TEL: 243-6399
LEBANON
FBS LINES
Piata Libertatii 1,
535500 Gheorgheni,
ROMANIA
TEL: (266) 364 609
Chahine S.A.L.
Gerge Zeidan St., Chahine
Bldg., Achrafieh, P.O.Box: 165857
Beirut, LEBANON
TEL: (01) 20-1441
RUSSIA
OMAN
BELGIUM/FRANCE/
HOLLAND/
LUXEMBOURG
MuTek
3-Bogatyrskaya Str. 1.k.l
107 564 Moscow, RUSSIA
TEL: (095) 169 5043
TALENTZ CENTRE L.L.C.
P.O. BOX 37, MUSCAT,
POSTAL CODE 113
TEL: 931-3705
SPAIN
QATAR
Roland Central Europe N.V.
Houtstraat 3, B-2260, Oevel
(Westerlo) BELGIUM
TEL: (014) 575811
Roland Iberia, S.L.
Paseo García Faria, 33-35
08005 Barcelona SPAIN
TEL: 93 493 91 00
Badie Studio & Stores
P.O. Box 62,
Doha, QATAR
TEL: 423554
HONDURAS
CZECH REP.
SWEDEN
SAUDI ARABIA
Almacen Pajaro Azul S.A. de C.V.
BO.Paz Barahona
3 Ave.11 Calle S.O
San Pedro Sula, Honduras
TEL: (504) 553-2029
K-AUDIO
Kardasovska 626.
CZ-198 00 Praha 9,
CZECH REP.
TEL: (2) 666 10529
Roland Scandinavia A/S
SWEDISH SALES OFFICE
Danvik Center 28, 2 tr.
S-131 30 Nacka SWEDEN
TEL: (0)8 702 00 20
aDawliah Universal
Electronics APL
Corniche Road, Aldossary
Bldg., 1st Floor, Alkhobar,
SAUDI ARABIA
MARTINIQUE
DENMARK
SWITZERLAND
Musique & Son
Z.I.Les Mangle
97232 Le Lamantin
Martinique F.W.I.
TEL: 596 596 426860
Roland Scandinavia A/S
Nordhavnsvej 7, Postbox 880,
DK-2100 Copenhagen
DENMARK
TEL: 3916 6200
Roland (Switzerland) AG
Landstrasse 5, Postfach,
CH-4452 Itingen,
SWITZERLAND
TEL: (061) 927-8383
P.O.Box 2154, Alkhobar 31952
SAUDI ARABIA
TEL: (03) 898 2081
FINLAND
UKRAINE
Roland Scandinavia As, Filial
Finland
Elannontie 5
FIN-01510 Vantaa, FINLAND
TEL: (0)9 68 24 020
TIC-TAC
Mira Str. 19/108
P.O. Box 180
295400 Munkachevo,
UKRAINE
TEL: (03131) 414-40
ECUADOR
Mas Musika
Rumichaca 822 y Zaruma
Guayaquil - Ecuador
TEL:(593-4)2302364
GUATEMALA
Casa Instrumental
Calzada Roosevelt 34-01,zona 11
Ciudad de Guatemala
Guatemala
TEL:(502) 599-2888
Gigamusic SARL
10 Rte De La Folie
97200 Fort De France
Martinique F.W.I.
TEL: 596 596 715222
MEXICO
Casa Veerkamp, s.a. de c.v.
Av. Toluca No. 323, Col. Olivar
de los Padres 01780 Mexico
D.F. MEXICO
TEL: (55) 5668-6699
NICARAGUA
Bansbach Instrumentos
Musicales Nicaragua
Altamira D'Este Calle Principal
de la Farmacia 5ta.Avenida
1 Cuadra al Lago.#503
Managua, Nicaragua
TEL: (505)277-2557
AUSTRIA
Roland Elektronische
Musikinstrumente HmbH.
Austrian Office
Eduard-Bodem-Gasse 8,
A-6020 Innsbruck, AUSTRIA
TEL: (0512) 26 44 260
GERMANY
Roland Elektronische
Musikinstrumente HmbH.
Oststrasse 96, 22844
Norderstedt, GERMANY
TEL: (040) 52 60090
GREECE
STOLLAS S.A.
Music Sound Light
155, New National Road
Patras 26442, GREECE
TEL: 2610 435400
HUNGARY
Roland East Europe Ltd.
Warehouse Area ‘DEPO’ Pf.83
H-2046 Torokbalint,
HUNGARY
SYRIA
Technical Light & Sound
Center
Rawda, Abdul Qader Jazairi St.
Bldg. No. 21, P.O.BOX 13520,
Damascus, SYRIA
TEL: (011) 223-5384
TURKEY
UNITED KINGDOM
Roland (U.K.) Ltd.
Atlantic Close, Swansea
Enterprise Park, SWANSEA
SA7 9FJ,
UNITED KINGDOM
TEL: (01792) 702701
MIDDLE EAST
Ant Muzik aletleri ithalat ve
ihracat Ltd Sti
Siraselviler Caddesi
Siraselviler Pasaji No:74/20
Taksim - Istanbul, TURKEY
TEL: (0212) 2449624
Owner’s Manual
EUROPE
When you need repair service, call your nearest EDIROL/Roland Service Center or authorized
EDIROL/Roland distributor in your country as shown below.
Owner’s Manual
Bedienungsanleitung
Mode d’emploi
Manuale d’uso
Manual del usuario
Before using this unit, carefully read the sections entitled:
“USING THE UNIT SAFELY” and “IMPORTANT NOTES” (p. 2;
p. 5). These sections provide important information concerning
the proper operation of the unit. Additionally, in order to feel
assured that you have gained a good grasp of every feature
provided by your new unit, Owner’s Manual should be read in
its entirety. The manual should be saved and kept on hand as a
convenient reference.
U.A.E.
Zak Electronics & Musical
Instruments Co. L.L.C.
Zabeel Road, Al Sherooq Bldg.,
No. 14, Grand Floor, Dubai,
U.A.E.
TEL: (04) 3360715
BAHRAIN
Moon Stores
No.16, Bab Al Bahrain Avenue,
P.O.Box 247, Manama 304,
State of BAHRAIN
TEL: 17 211 005
TEL: (23) 511011
As of January 15, 2005 (EDIROL-1)
Copyright © 2004 ROLAND CORPORATION
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced in
any form without the written permission of ROLAND CORPORATION.
03892123
’05-2-2N
For the U.K.
IMPORTANT: THE WIRES IN THIS MAINS LEAD ARE COLOURED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE FOLLOWING CODE.
Used for instructions intended to alert
the user to the risk of death or severe
injury should the unit be used
improperly.
Used for instructions intended to alert
the user to the risk of injury or material
damage should the unit be used
improperly.
* Material damage refers
other adverse effects
respect to the home
furnishings, as well
animals or pets.
to damage or
caused with
and all its
to domestic
001
• Before using this unit, make sure to
read the instructions below, and the
Owner’s Manual.
..................................................................................................
002c
• Do not open (or modify in any way)
the unit or its AC adaptor.
..................................................................................................
003
• Do not attempt to repair the unit, or
replace parts within it (except when
this manual provides specific instructions directing you to do so). Refer all
servicing to your retailer, the nearest Roland
Service Center, or an authorized Roland
distributor, as listed on the “Information”
page.
..................................................................................................
004
• Never use or store the unit in places
that are:
• Subject to temperature extremes
(e.g., direct sunlight in an enclosed
vehicle, near a heating duct, on top
of heat-generating equipment); or are
• Damp (e.g., baths, washrooms, on wet
floors); or are
• Humid; or are
• Exposed to rain; or are
• Dusty; or are
• Subject to high levels of vibration.
..................................................................................................
2
The
symbol alerts the user to important instructions
or warnings.The specific meaning of the symbol is
determined by the design contained within the
triangle. In the case of the symbol at left, it is used for
general cautions, warnings, or alerts to danger.
The
symbol alerts the user to items that must never
be carried out (are forbidden). The specific thing that
must not be done is indicated by the design contained
within the circle. In the case of the symbol at left, it
means that the unit must never be disassembled.
The ● symbol alerts the user to things that must be
carried out. The specific thing that must be done is
indicated by the design contained within the circle. In
the case of the symbol at left, it means that the powercord plug must be unplugged from the outlet.
007
• Make sure you always have the unit
placed so it is level and sure to remain
stable. Never place it on stands that
could wobble, or on inclined surfaces.
..................................................................................................
008c
• Be sure to use only the AC adaptor
supplied with the unit. Also, make
sure the line voltage at the installation
matches the input voltage specified on the AC
adaptor’s body. Other AC adaptors may use a
different polarity, or be designed for a
different voltage, so their use could result in
damage, malfunction, or electric shock.
..................................................................................................
008e
• Use only the attached power-supply
cord. Also, the supplied power cord
must not be used with any other
device.
..................................................................................................
009
• Do not excessively twist or bend the
power cord, nor place heavy objects
on it. Doing so can damage the cord,
producing severed elements and short
circuits. Damaged cords are fire and shock
hazards!
..................................................................................................
BLUE:
NEUTRAL
BROWN: LIVE
As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying
the terminals in your plug, proceed as follows:
The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK.
The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED.
Under no circumstances must either of the above wires be connected to the earth terminal of a three pin plug.
For EU Countries
This product complies with the requirements of European Directive 89/336/EEC.
For the USA
FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION
RADIO FREQUENCY INTERFERENCE STATEMENT
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential
installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in
accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee
that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or
television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the
interference by one or more of the following measures:
– Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
– Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
– Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
– Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Unauthorized changes or modification to this system can void the users authority to operate this equipment.
This equipment requires shielded interface cables in order to meet FCC class B Limit.
For Canada
NOTICE
This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations.
AVIS
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du Règlement sur le matériel brouilleur du Canada.
For the USA
DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY
Compliance Information Statement
Model Name :
Type of Equipment :
Responsible Party :
Address :
Telephone :
R-1
WAVE/MP3 RECORDER
Edirol Corporation North America
425 Sequoia Drive, Suite 114, Bellingham, WA 98226
(360) 594-4276
R-1_egfis1.book 3 ページ 2005年1月20日 木曜日 午前9時45分
010
• This unit, either alone or in combination with an amplifier and
headphones or speakers, may be
capable of producing sound levels that could
cause permanent hearing loss. Do not operate
for a long period of time at a high volume
level, or at a level that is uncomfortable. If
you experience any hearing loss or ringing in
the ears, you should immediately stop using
the unit, and consult an audiologist.
..................................................................................................
011
• Do not allow any objects (e.g.,
flammable material, coins, pins); or
liquids of any kind (water, soft drinks,
etc.) to penetrate the unit.
..................................................................................................
012b
• Immediately turn the power off,
remove the AC adaptor from the
outlet, and request servicing by your retailer,
the nearest Roland Service Center, or an
authorized Edirol/Roland distributor, as
listed on the “Information” page when:
• The AC adaptor, the power-supply cord,
or the plug has been damaged; or
• If smoke or unusual odor occurs
• Objects have fallen into, or liquid has been
spilled onto the unit; or
• The unit has been exposed to rain (or
otherwise has become wet); or
• The unit does not appear to operate
normally or exhibits a marked change in
performance.
015
• Do not force the unit’s power-supply
cord to share an outlet with an unreasonable number of other devices. Be
especially careful when using extension
cords—the total power used by all devices
you have connected to the extension cord’s
outlet must never exceed the power rating
(watts/amperes) for the extension cord.
Excessive loads can cause the insulation on
the cord to heat up and eventually melt
through.
..................................................................................................
016
• Before using the unit in a foreign
country, consult with your retailer, the
nearest Roland Service Center, or an authorized Edirol/Roland distributor, as listed on
the “Information” page.
..................................................................................................
019
• Batteries must never be recharged,
heated, taken apart, or thrown into fire
or water.
..................................................................................................
..................................................................................................
013
• In households with small children, an
adult should provide supervision
until the child is capable of following all the
rules essential for the safe operation of the
unit.
..................................................................................................
014
• Protect the unit from strong impact.
(Do not drop it!)
..................................................................................................
3
R-1_egfis1.book 4 ページ 2005年1月20日 木曜日 午前9時45分
101b
• The unit and the AC adaptor should
be located so their location or position
does not interfere with their proper ventilation.
..................................................................................................
102c
• Always grasp only the plug on the AC
adaptor cord when plugging into, or
unplugging from, an outlet or this
unit.
110b
• Whenever you suspect the possibility
of lightning in your area, disconnect
the AC adaptor from the outlet.
..................................................................................................
111: Selection
• If used improperly, batteries may
explode or leak and cause damage or
injury. In the interest of safety, please
read and observe the following
precautions (P. 20).
1
• Carefully follow the installation
instructions for batteries, and make sure
you observe the correct polarity.
..................................................................................................
103b
• At regular intervals, you should
unplug the AC adaptor and clean it by
using a dry cloth to wipe all dust and
other accumulations away from its prongs.
Also, disconnect the power plug from the
power outlet whenever the unit is to remain
unused for an extended period of time. Any
accumulation of dust between the power plug
and the power outlet can result in poor
insulation and lead to fire.
2
• Avoid using new batteries together with
used ones. In addition, avoid mixing
different types of batteries.
3
• Remove the batteries whenever the unit is
to remain unused for an extended period
of time.
5
• If a battery has leaked, use a soft piece of
cloth or paper towel to wipe all remnants
of the discharge from the battery
compartment. Then install new batteries.
To avoid inflammation of the skin, make
sure that none of the battery discharge gets
onto your hands or skin. Exercise the
utmost caution so that none of the
discharge gets near your eyes. Immediately rinse the affected area with running
water if any of the discharge has entered
the eyes.
..................................................................................................
104
• Try to prevent cords and cables from
becoming entangled. Also, all cords
and cables should be placed so they are out of
the reach of children.
..................................................................................................
106
• Never climb on top of, nor place heavy
objects on the unit.
..................................................................................................
107c
• Never handle the AC adaptor or its
plugs with wet hands when plugging
into, or unplugging from, an outlet or
this unit.
..................................................................................................
108b
• Before moving the unit, disconnect the
AC adaptor and all cords coming from
external devices.
..................................................................................................
109b
• Before cleaning the unit, turn off the
power and unplug the AC adaptor
from the outlet (P. 19).
..................................................................................................
4
6
• Never keep batteries together with metallic
objects such as ballpoint pens, necklaces,
hairpins, etc.
..................................................................................................
112
• Used batteries must be disposed of in
compliance with whatever regulations for their safe disposal that may
be observed in the region in which you live.
..................................................................................................
R-1_egfis1.book 5 ページ 2005年1月20日 木曜日 午前9時45分
IMPORTANTS NOTES
291a
In addition to the items listed under “USING THE UNIT SAFELY” on page 5, please read and
observe the following:
Power Supply
301
• Do not connect this unit to same electrical
outlet that is being used by an electrical
appliance that is controlled by an inverter
(such as a refrigerator, washing machine,
microwave oven, or air conditioner), or that
contains a motor. Depending on the way in
which the electrical appliance is used, power
supply noise may cause this unit to
malfunction or may produce audible noise. If
it is not practical to use a separate electrical
outlet, connect a power supply noise filter
between this unit and the electrical outlet.
302
• The AC adaptor will begin to generate heat
after long hours of consecutive use. This is
normal, and is not a cause for concern.
303a
• Since this device draws a relatively large
amount of electrical current, we recommend
that you use it with the AC adaptor unless AC
power is unavailable. Should you prefer to
use batteries, please use the alkaline type.
304a
• When installing or replacing batteries, always
turn off the power on this unit and disconnect
any other devices you may have connected.
This way, you can prevent malfunction and/
or damage to speakers or other devices.
307
• Before connecting this unit to other devices,
turn off the power to all units. This will help
prevent malfunctions and/or damage to
speakers or other devices.
Placement
351
• Using the unit near power amplifiers (or other
equipment containing large power transformers) may induce hum. To alleviate the
problem, change the orientation of this unit;
or move it farther away from the source of
interference.
352a
• This device may interfere with radio and
television reception. Do not use this device in
the vicinity of such receivers.
352b
• Noise may be produced if wireless communications devices, such as cell phones, are
operated in the vicinity of this unit. Such noise
could occur when receiving or initiating a call,
or while conversing. Should you experience
such problems, you should relocate such
wireless devices so they are at a greater
distance from this unit, or switch them off.
354a
• Do not expose the unit to direct sunlight,
place it near devices that radiate heat, leave it
inside an enclosed vehicle, or otherwise
subject it to temperature extremes. Excessive
heat can deform or discolor the unit.
355b
• When moved from one location to another
where the temperature and/or humidity is
very different, water droplets (condensation)
may form inside the unit. Damage or
malfunction may result if you attempt to use
the unit in this condition. Therefore, before
using the unit, you must allow it to stand for
several hours, until the condensation has
completely evaporated.
Maintenance
401a
• For everyday cleaning wipe the unit with a
soft, dry cloth or one that has been slightly
dampened with water. To remove stubborn
dirt, use a cloth impregnated with a mild,
non-abrasive detergent. Afterwards, be sure
to wipe the unit thoroughly with a soft, dry
cloth.
402
• Never use benzine, thinners, alcohol or
solvents of any kind, to avoid the possibility
of discoloration and/or deformation.
Repairs
and Data
452
• Please be aware that all data contained in the
unit’s memory may be lost when the unit is
sent for repairs. Important data should always
be written down on paper (when possible).
During repairs, due care is taken to avoid the
loss of data. However, in certain cases (such as
when circuitry related to memory itself is out
of order), we regret that it may not be possible
to restore the data, and Roland assumes no
liability concerning such loss of data.
5
R-1_egfis1.book 6 ページ 2005年1月20日 木曜日 午前9時45分
IMPORTANTS NOTES
Additional
Precautions
551
Before Using Cards
• Please be aware that the contents of memory
can be irretrievably lost as a result of a
malfunction, or the improper operation of the
unit. To protect yourself against the risk of
loosing important data, we recommend that
you periodically save a backup copy of
important data you have stored in the unit’s
memory on a hard disk.
Using DATA Cards
704
• Carefully insert the DATA card all the way
in—until it is firmly in place.
fig.M512-Insert
552
• Unfortunately, it may be impossible to restore
the contents of data that was stored on a
memory card once it has been lost. Roland
Corporation assumes no liability concerning
such loss of data.
CompactFlash™
Reverse Side
553
• Use a reasonable amount of care when using
the unit’s buttons, sliders, or other controls;
and when using its jacks and connectors.
Rough handling can lead to malfunctions.
554
• Never strike or apply strong pressure to the
display.
555
• A small amount of noise may be heard from
the display during normal operation.
556
• When connecting / disconnecting all cables,
grasp the connector itself—never pull on the
cable. This way you will avoid causing shorts,
or damage to the cable’s internal elements.
558a
• To avoid disturbing your neighbors, try to
keep the unit’s volume at reasonable levels.
You may prefer to use headphones, so you do
not need to be concerned about those around
you (especially when it is late at night).
559a
• When you need to transport the unit, package
it in the box (including padding) that it came
in, if possible. Otherwise, you will need to use
equivalent packaging materials.
562
• Use a cable from Roland to make the
connection. If using some other make of
connection cable, please note the following
precautions.
• Some connection cables contain resistors. Do not
use cables that incorporate resistors for connecting
to this unit. The use of such cables can cause the
sound level to be extremely low, or impossible to
hear. For information on cable specifications,
contact the manufacturer of the cable.
• Depending on the conditions in which you
use the R-1, you may notice a slight sensation
of discomfort or roughness when touching the
R-1 itself or a metal part of a connected mic.
This is due to an extremely small electrical
charge which poses absolutely no danger to
the human body. If this bothers you, you can
use the R-1 on battery power as desired.
6
705
• Never touch the terminals of the DATA card.
Also, avoid getting the terminals dirty.
707
• This unit’s memory card slot accepts
CompactFlash memory cards. Microdrive
storage media are not compatible.
708
• CompactFlash cards are constructed using
precision components; handle the cards
carefully, paying particular note to the
following.
• To prevent damage to the cards from static
electricity, be sure to discharge any static
electricity from your own body before
handling the cards.
• Do not touch or allow metal to come into
contact with the contact portion of the
cards.
• Do not bend, drop, or subject cards to
strong shock or vibration.
• Do not keep cards in direct sunlight, in
closed vehicles, or other such locations
(storage temperature: -25 to 85˚ C).
• Do not allow cards to become wet.
• Do not disassemble or modify the cards.
R-1_egfis1.book 7 ページ 2005年1月20日 木曜日 午前9時45分
IMPORTANTS NOTES
Copyright
851
• Unauthorized recording, distribution, sale,
lending, public performance, broadcasting, or
the like, in whole or in part, of a work
(musical composition, video, broadcast, public
performance, or the like) whose copyright is
held by a third party is prohibited by law.
852b
• When transmitting audio signals to an
external device via a digital connection, this
device is able to transmit data without being
subjected to certain restrictions of the Serial
Copy Management System (SCMS). This is
because the unit is intended solely for musical
production, and is designed not to be subject
to restrictions as long as it is used to record
works (such as your own compositions) that
do not infringe on the copyrights of others.
(SCMS is a feature that prohibits secondgeneration and later copying through a digital
connection. It is built into MD recorders and
other consumer digital-audio equipment as a
copyright-protection feature.)
853
• Do not use this unit for purposes that could
infringe on a copyright held by a third party.
We assume no responsibility whatsoever with
regard to any infringements of third-party
copyrights arising through your use of this
unit.
204
* Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
206j
* Windows® is known officially as: “Microsoft® Windows® operating system.”
209
* Mac OS is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc.
234
* CompactFlash and
Flash association.
are trademarks of SanDisk Corporation and licensed by Compact-
235
* Roland Corporation is an authorized licensee of the CompactFlash™ and CF logo (
trademarks.
)
add
* PortalPlayer and the PortalPlayer logo are trademarks owned by PortalPlayer, Inc.
add
* MPEG Layer-3 audio coding technology licensed from Fraunhofer IIS
and Thomson multimedia.
7
R-1_egfis1.book 8 ページ 2005年1月20日 木曜日 午前9時45分
Checking the included items
The R-1 comes with the following items. Immediately after opening the package, please
check that you have all of these items. If any items are missing, please contact the dealer
where you purchased the R-1.
■ R-1
fig.r-1
■ AC adaptor
This AC adaptor is designed specifically for
the R-1. Do not attempt to use any other
adaptor with the R-1.
“Connecting the AC adaptor and
turning on the power” (p. 19)
■ USB cable
(mini B type: 1 meter)
You can use this cable to connect the R-1 to
the USB connector of your computer.
“Connecting the R-1 to your
computer” (p. 44)
* If the AC adaptor or USB cable becomes
damaged or if you need a replacement for any
reason, please contact one of the Service Centers
listed in the “Information” section at the end of
this manual.
8
■ CompactFlash card (64 MB)
You can use this memory card to carry out
recording and playback on the R-1.
“Memory card handling” (p. 25)
■ Carrying case
You can use this case to protect the R-1
while it is being transported or stored.
■ Owner’s manual
This is the document you’re reading. Keep
it at hand for easy reference.
R-1_egfis1.book 9 ページ 2005年1月20日 木曜日 午前9時45分
Contents
Checking the included items
8
The R-1’s controls and connectors
12
Getting ready to use the R-1
18
Basic connections ...................................................................................................... 18
Connecting the AC adaptor and turning on the power............................... 19
Installing the batteries and turning on the power ........................................ 20
Connecting headphones ................................................................................... 22
Connecting digital speakers (digital devices)................................................ 23
Connecting analog speakers (analog devices)............................................... 24
Memory card handling ............................................................................................ 25
Types of files that the R-1 can handle .................................................................... 28
Basic recording methods
29
Recording with the internal microphone .............................................................. 29
Recording with an external microphone............................................................... 32
Recording from a cassette tape or CD ................................................................... 35
Playback methods
38
Normal playback ...................................................................................................... 38
REPEAT A-B (Repeat playback) ............................................................................. 40
1/2 PLAY (Half-speed playback) ........................................................................... 42
PLAY MODE (Playback mode) .............................................................................. 43
Using the R-1 with your computer
44
Connecting the R-1 to your computer ................................................................... 44
Disconnecting the R-1 from your computer ......................................................... 45
Using effects
46
Effect list..................................................................................................................... 47
Applying an effect .................................................................................................... 52
Various settings
54
System settings (Setup mode) ................................................................................. 54
Restoring the factory settings.................................................................................. 65
List of messages
66
Troubleshooting
67
Problems with recording ......................................................................................... 67
Problems with playback .......................................................................................... 69
Other problems ......................................................................................................... 70
Deutsch
Bedienung und Anschlüsse des R-1
72
9
R-1_egfis1.book 10 ページ 2005年1月20日 木曜日 午前9時45分
Contents
Vorbereitungen zum Einsatz des R-1
78
Formatieren einer CompactFlash-Karte ......................................................... 78
Einfache Aufnahmemethoden
79
Aufnahmen mit dem Einbaumikrofon .................................................................. 79
Aufnehmen mit externem Mikrofon...................................................................... 82
Wiedergabemethoden
85
Normale Wiedergabe ............................................................................................... 85
REPEAT A-B (Wiedergabewiederholung)............................................................ 86
1/2 PLAY (halbierte Wiedergabegeschwindigkeit) ............................................ 87
PLAY MODE (Wiedergabemodus)........................................................................ 88
Einsatz von Effekten
89
Anwenden eines Effekts .......................................................................................... 89
Verschiedene Einstellungen
90
Systemeinstellungen (Konfigurationsmodus) ...................................................... 90
Français
Commandes et connecteurs
92
Préparatifs avant utilisation du R-1
98
Formatage d’une carte CompactFlash ............................................................ 98
Méthodes d’enregistrement
99
Enregistrement à l’aide du micro intégré.............................................................. 99
Enregistrement avec microphone externe........................................................... 102
Modes de lecture
105
Lecture normale ...................................................................................................... 105
REPEAT A-B (lecture en boucle) .......................................................................... 106
1/2 PLAY (lecture en mode demi-vitesse).......................................................... 107
PLAY MODE (modes de lecture) ......................................................................... 108
Utilisation des effets
109
Application d’un effet ............................................................................................ 109
Paramétrages divers
110
Paramétrage système (mode Setup)..................................................................... 110
Italiano
Controlli e connettori dell’R-1
112
Preparazione all’utilizzo dell’R-1
118
Formattazione di una scheda CompactFlash............................................... 118
10
R-1_egfis1.book 11 ページ 2005年1月20日 木曜日 午前9時45分
Contents
Metodi di registrazione di base
119
Registrazione mediante il microfono interno ..................................................... 119
Registrazione mediante un microfono esterno................................................... 122
Metodi di riproduzione
125
Riproduzione normale ........................................................................................... 125
REPEAT A-B (Riproduzione ripetuta)................................................................. 126
1/2 PLAY (Riproduzione a velocità dimezzata) ................................................ 127
PLAY MODE (Modalità riproduzione) ............................................................... 128
Utilizzo degli effetti
129
Applicazione di un effetto ..................................................................................... 129
Impostazioni
130
Impostazioni del sistema (Setup mode) .............................................................. 130
Español
Controles y conectores de la unidad R-1
132
Preparación para el uso de la unidad R-1
138
Formateado de una tarjeta CompactFlash ................................................... 138
Métodos básicos de grabación
139
Grabación con el micrófono interno..................................................................... 139
Grabación con un micrófono externo .................................................................. 142
Métodos de reproducción
145
Reproducción normal............................................................................................. 145
REPETICIÓN A-B (repetición de la reproducción) ........................................... 146
REPRODUCCIÓN 1/2 (reproducción a la mitad de velocidad) ..................... 147
PLAY MODE (Modo de reproducción)............................................................... 148
Utilización de los efectos
149
Aplicación de un efecto.......................................................................................... 149
Algunos parámetros
150
Configuración del sistema (modo Setup (Configuración))............................... 150
Main specifications
152
Index
154
11
R-1_egfis1.book 12 ページ 2005年1月20日 木曜日 午前9時45分
The R-1’s controls and connectors
fig.panel-1
1
2
14
3
4
5
15
6
7
8
16
9
10
11
12
1
13
Internal mic
This is a stereo microphone that’s built into the R-1.
You can’t use the internal microphone if a microphone or other device is connected to
the mic jacks 18 or line input jacks 19 . If you want to use the internal microphone,
don’t connect anything to the other input jacks.
When recording via the internal microphone, set the mic type select switch to DYN.
2
Display
Various information about the R-1’s operating state is shown here.
3
EFFECT button
Press the EFFECT button to switch the effect on/off.
This button will light red when the effect is on.
If you turn this on before or during playback, the effect will be applied to the sound that
is being played back. If you turn this on before or during recording, the effect will be
applied to the sound that is being input; i.e., the sound that has been processed by the
effect will be recorded.
The R-1 provides various effects that let you modify the sound being played back or
recorded, giving the sound more impact or allowing more comfortable listening. You
can also transform the sound to give it a totally new character.
4
EDIT button
Use this button to make effect settings.
For details on the effects, refer to “Using effects” (p. 46). You can make effect settings
regardless of whether the EFFECT button is on or off.
12
R-1_egfis1.book 13 ページ 2005年1月20日 木曜日 午前9時45分
The R-1’s controls and connectors
5
MENU button
This button selects Setup mode, where you can make various settings for the R-1. Here
you can adjust the LCD contrast, specify the recording quality, and make various other
overall settings for the R-1. For details, refer to “Various settings” (p. 54)
DISPLAY button
English
6
This switches the contents of the R-1’s display.
In PLAY mode, this button will cycle through the playback time, the remaining
playback time in the current song (file), the type of song (file), and the bit rate.
Press the DISPLAY button to switch the contents of the display.
7
PREV button
8
Deutsch
Use this button to move to the beginning of the song or to select the preceding song.
Pressing this button in the middle of a song will move to the beginning of that song. If
you are already at the beginning (00:00) of the song, pressing this button will take you
to the preceding song. You can press and hold down this button to rewind.
These operations are available while playing or stopped.
NEXT button
9
Français
Use this button to select the next song. You can press and hold down this button to fastforward.
These operations are available while playing or stopped.
REPEAT button
This button lets you play repeatedly between two points (A - B) you specify in the song.
Press this button once to mark point “A” and press it again to mark point “B.”
To cancel repeat playback, press the REPEAT button once again. When you cancel
repeat playback, points A and B will both be cancelled.
fig.repeat-a
1. During playback, press the REPEAT button once.
Song
A
Italiano
That point will be the beginning (point A) of the
repeated playback.
fig.repeat-b
2. Press the REPEAT button once again. That point
A
B
A
B
Song
Español
will be the end (point B) of the repeated playback.
fig.repeat-ab
Playback will occur repeatedly over the range you
specified in steps 1 and 2. To cancel repeat playback,
press the REPEAT button once again.
10
Song
SPEED button
This button slows the playback to half-speed. Press it once again to return to normal
speed. This is useful when you are playing along with music at an uncomfortably fast
tempo, or when listening to rapid speech.
13
R-1_egfis1.book 14 ページ 2005年1月20日 木曜日 午前9時45分
The R-1’s controls and connectors
fig.panel-2
1
17
2
18
19
14
3
20
4
5
15
6
7
8
21
9
10
11
12
11
16
13
STOP button
This button stops playback or recording.
12
PLAY/PAUSE button
This button starts playback. It also pauses recording or playback.
If you press this button while playing, playback will pause, and the R-1’s display will
indicate PLAY-PAUSE. Press the PLAY/PAUSE button once again to resume
playback.
Similarly, if you press this button while recording, recording will pause. The R-1’s
display will indicate REC-PAUSE, and the REC button will blink red.
To resume recording from the Rec Standby condition, press the REC button once again
(or press the PLAY/PAUSE button). The REC button lights red during recording.
13
REC button
When stopped, pressing the REC button will put the R-1 in recording-standby mode.
The R-1's display will indicate REC STANDBY, and the REC button will blink red.
To begin recording from recording-standby mode, press the REC button once again (or
press the PLAY/PAUSE button). During recording, the REC button will light red.
14
VALUE dial
Use this dial to select songs, to specify effect types and values, and to select setup mode
items.
15
EXIT button
Use this button to return to the previous item in Effect Edit or Setup mode. In Setup
mode, your value changes will be cancelled if you press the EXIT button before
pressing the ENTER button.
16
ENTER button
Use this button to select an item or finalize a change in Effect Edit or Setup mode.
14
R-1_egfis1.book 15 ページ 2005年1月20日 木曜日 午前9時45分
The R-1’s controls and connectors
17
Mic input jack
Accepts connection of a microphone.
If a cable is plugged into the line input jack, audio will not be input through
the mic input jack.
18
English
Set the mic type select switch 19 to the appropriate position depending on whether
the connected microphone is a dynamic microphone or a plugin-powered miniature
condenser microphone.
Stereo microphones are supported; use a stereo mini-type cable to make connections. If
you use a monaural microphone, set the Setup mode “10 Input Select” setting to
MONO. For details on this setting, refer to “System settings (Setup mode)” (p. 54).
Line input jack
19
Deutsch
If you want to input an audio signal from an audio device or electronic musical
instrument into the R-1, use a stereo mini-plug cable to connect it to this jack.
Mic type select switch
Set this switch to the appropriate position according to the type of microphone you’ve
connected to the mic input jack 17 .
CND
20
Use this setting if you’ve connected a dynamic microphone.
If you’re using the internal microphone, set this to DYN.
Use this setting if you’ve connected a miniature condenser microphone that requires a power supply. You must use a “plug-in powered” microphone. This jack
supplies a voltage of 2 V.
* If this switch is set to CND, do not connect any microphone or device other than
a “plug-in powered” microphone. Any other type of microphone or device may
be damaged.
Français
DYN
Input volume
USB connector
You can use the included USB cable to connect this connector to your computer.
If the R-1 is connected to your computer, the song files you record can be transferred or
copied to your computer. You can also transfer or copy MP3 or WAV files from your
computer to the R-1 so that these files can be played on the R-1.
This connector supports USB 2.0 (hi-speed USB), allowing files to be transferred
rapidly.
If you want to connect the R-1 to your computer, please refer to “Connecting the R-1
to your computer” (p. 44).
When your computer has correctly recognized the R-1, the R-1’s display will indicate
Connected via USB.
Español
21
Italiano
This adjusts the input volume of the sound from the built-in mics 1 , mic input jack
17 , or line input jack 18 .
Use the procedure described in “Adjusting the input level” (p. 30) to adjust this while
watching the input level.
While the R-1 is connected to a computer, all functionality of the R-1 (other
than its power switch) is disabled; operating the buttons or switches will not
do anything.
15
R-1_egfis1.book 16 ページ 2005年1月20日 木曜日 午前9時45分
The R-1’s controls and connectors
fig.panel-3
1
22 23
22
24
25
26
27
28
Power switch
This turns the power on/off.
Do not turn off the power during playback or recording. You must make sure that
playback or recording is stopped before you turn off the power.
• If you accidentally turn off the power during recording, the data being recorded will
not be saved to the CompactFlash card.
• The CompactFlash card may be damaged if you turn off the R-1’s power while data is
being read or written, such as during playback or recording.
• If you turn off the R-1’s power while the “Now working...” indication is shown during
effect editing or while saving a setting you’ve changed, the R-1 will become unstable,
and may become unable to start up.
Be very careful to never turn off the power when the unit is in such states.
23
AC adaptor jack
Connect the included AC adaptor to this jack.
24
HOLD switch
If you set the HOLD switch to the ON position, button presses on the R-1 will be
disabled; this is a convenient way to prevent the R-1 from being operated accidentally.
However, even when the HOLD switch is ON, the mic type select switch 19 , input
volume 20 , power switch 22 , and output volume 25 will still be operable.
25
Output volume
This adjusts the volume that is sent from the headphone/line output/digital
output jack 26 . However, the volume of the digital output is not adjustable.
26
Headphone/line output/digital output jack
This jack outputs audio from the R-1 to headphones or external speakers. If you want to
output a digital signal, use a round optical mini-type digital cable.
27
Eject button
Press this to eject the CompactFlash card inserted in the memory card slot
28
Memory card slot
Insert a CompactFlash card into this slot.
CompactFlash is the only type of memory card that the R-1 can use.
16
28
.
R-1_egfis1.book 17 ページ 2005年1月20日 木曜日 午前9時45分
The R-1’s controls and connectors
English
fig.panel-4
Deutsch
29
30
29
Battery compartment
Memory card slot cover
Italiano
This cover prevents the CompactFlash card from being removed accidentally. When
you open the cover, you will see the memory card slot 28 and eject button 27 .
Español
30
Français
If you want to operate the R-1 on batteries, install the batteries here. If you are operating
the R-1 with its AC adaptor, you don’t need to install batteries.
You must switch off the R-1’s power before changing from AC adaptor operation to
battery operation, or from battery operation to AC adaptor operation.
Please read “Installing the batteries and turning on the power” (p. 20) before you use
the R-1.
17
R-1_egfis1.book 18 ページ 2005年1月20日 木曜日 午前9時45分
Getting ready to use the R-1
Basic connections
* Before making connections with other equipment, you must minimize the volume and turn
off the power of all of your equipment in order to prevent malfunction and/or speaker
damage.
* If you use a cable with a built-in resistor, the volume of the device connected to the line input
jack (LINE IN) may be too low. If so, you should use a connection cable that does not contain
a resistor.
fig.basic_50
MD player or similar for recording
DIGITAL IN
Headphones
AC adaptor
Stereo mic
PHONES
(OPTICAL)
DC IN
MIC
LINE IN
USB
LINE OUT
USB
CD/MD player for playback
Computer
The R-1 does not have built-in speakers. In order to hear the playback, you will need to
provide headphones or speakers.
You can use the R-1’s headphone jack as a digital output (optical out) for connection to
a digital device, or as a line output for connection to an analog device. Use the
appropriate cable for your device.
For details, refer to“Connecting headphones” (p. 22), “Connecting digital speakers
(digital devices)” (p. 23), or “Connecting analog speakers (analog devices)” (p. 24).
* Howling could be produced depending on the location of microphones relative to speakers.
This can be remedied by:
1. Changing the orientation of the microphone(s).
2. Relocating microphone(s) at a greater distance from speakers.
3. Lowering volume levels.
18
R-1_egfis1.book 19 ページ 2005年1月20日 木曜日 午前9時45分
Getting ready to use the R-1
Connecting the AC adaptor and turning on the power
941
English
* Once the connections have been completed (p. 18), turn on power to your various devices in
the order specified. By turning on devices in the wrong order, you risk causing malfunction
and/or damage to speakers and other devices.
942
* This unit is equipped with a protection circuit. A brief interval (a few seconds) after power
up is required before the unit will operate normally.
1
Deutsch
* If batteries are installed and the AC adaptor is also connected, the power will be supplied
from the AC adaptor.
Turn off the R-1’s power switch.
Français
fig.off
OFF
2
Connect the DC plug of the AC adaptor to the DC IN jack on the rear panel of the
R-1.
* Use only the AC adaptor supplied with the R-1.
3
4
Italiano
Plug the AC adaptor into an AC outlet.
Turn on the R-1’s power switch.
Español
fig.on-off
ON
* If batteries are installed and the AC adaptor is also connected, the power will be supplied
from the AC adaptor.
19
R-1_egfis1.book 20 ページ 2005年1月20日 木曜日 午前9時45分
Getting ready to use the R-1
Installing the batteries and turning on the power
Types of batteries you can use:
•
•
AA alkaline batteries (LR6)
AA nickel metal hydride batteries (HR15/51)
* The R-1 itself is not able to charge nickel metal hydride batteries; you will need to use a
separate battery charger.
fig.battery
1
2
3
4
Turn off the R-1’s power switch.
Detach the battery compartment cover
located on the bottom panel of the R-1.
Insert two AA batteries into the
battery compartment, making sure to
observe the correct polarity (+ and indications).
Close the battery compartment cover.
fig.on-2
5
Turn on the R-1’s power switch.
ON
Note when using the R-1 on batteries
20
•
We recommend using alkaline batteries which have a longer life.
•
Don’t mix new batteries with used batteries or batteries of different types.
•
If you won’t be using the R-1 for an extended period of time, you should remove
the batteries to prevent them from leaking and damaging the unit.
•
If the R-1 is running on batteries, the display may turn off (the Sleep function) or
the LCD backlight may turn off to save power. If you want to change these
settings, proceed as described in “System settings (Setup mode)” (p. 54).
If you’re using the AC adaptor, these settings are not used.
•
When connecting the R-1 to your computer via a USB cable, you must use the AC
adaptor to prevent the batteries from running down while connected.
R-1_egfis1.book 21 ページ 2005年1月20日 木曜日 午前9時45分
Getting ready to use the R-1
About the remaining battery capacity
English
When the batteries run low, a battery icon ( ) is displayed blinking in the upper right
of the display. When this message appears, replace the batteries as soon as possible.
If you continue using the unit when the batteries have run low, the following screen will
appear, and all of the R-1’s functionality will stop.
fig.battery.eps
Turn off the power switch and replace the batteries with fresh ones.
Battery life
Continuous playback
Continuous recording
Deutsch
(When using alkaline batteries, MP3 192 kbps, and a 256 MB CompactFlash card)
approximately 5.5 hours
approximately 2 hours
* The battery life indicated above is approximate. Battery life will vary depending on the
environment in which you are using the R-1 and your method of use.
Español
Italiano
Français
* The battery life will be shorter if you allow display backlighting to remain on or if you use
numerous effects.
21
R-1_egfis1.book 22 ページ 2005年1月20日 木曜日 午前9時45分
Getting ready to use the R-1
Connecting headphones
Here’s how to connect headphones.
fig.phones
Output volume
Headphone jack
Headphones
1
2
3
Turn off the power of the R-1.
Turn the output volume all the way toward the left to minimize the volume.
Connect your headphones to the headphone jack.
Now you can use the R-1 to record or play back as described in “Basic recording
methods” (p. 29) or “Playback methods” (p. 38).
Even if the song (file) was recorded at an appropriate recording level, you may hear
distortion or crackling during loud passages of the song if the output volume is too
high.
22
R-1_egfis1.book 23 ページ 2005年1月20日 木曜日 午前9時45分
Getting ready to use the R-1
Connecting digital speakers (digital devices)
Here’s how to connect amplified speakers that have digital input jacks.
fig.speaker
Optical cable
English
Digital output jack
Round optical mini-plug
Rectangular optical plug
Deutsch
DIGITAL IN
(OPTICAL)
Français
Amplified speakers
2
Turn off the power of the R-1.
Italiano
1
Set the volume of the speakers to the minimum setting.
* If you’re using a digital connection, the R-1’s output volume control will not affect the
volume.
* The digital output has a sampling frequency of 44.1 kHz.
3
Connect the digital output jack to your digital-compatible amplified speakers.
Español
Use a cable with a round optical mini-plug to connect to the R-1’s digital output
jack.
Cables are not included; you will need to provide them separately.
Now you can use the R-1 to record or play back as described in “Basic recording
methods” (p. 29) or “Playback methods” (p. 38).
4
Gradually raise the speaker volume to an appropriate listening level.
If you’re using a digital connection, the R-1’s output volume control will not affect
the volume.
23
R-1_egfis1.book 24 ページ 2005年1月20日 木曜日 午前9時45分
Getting ready to use the R-1
Connecting analog speakers (analog devices)
fig.analog
Output volume
Line output jack
Audio cable
Amplified speakers
1
2
3
LINE IN
Turn off the power of the R-1.
Turn the output volume all the way toward the left to minimize the volume.
Connect the R-1’s line output jack to your amplified speakers.
You will need an audio cable for connection to the R-1's line output jack.
Cables are not included; you will need to provide them separately.
Now you can use the R-1 for recording or playback as described in “Basic recording
methods” (p. 29) or “Playback methods” (p. 38).
4
Gradually turn the output volume toward the right to increase the volume.
You can also adjust the volume of your speakers.
24
R-1_egfis1.book 25 ページ 2005年1月20日 木曜日 午前9時45分
Getting ready to use the R-1
Memory card handling
The R-1 uses CompactFlash memory cards.
•
•
CompactFlash cards of up to 4 GB (Gigabytes) in size can be used.
Even when using a high-capacity CompactFlash card, recording will stop when
the file being recorded reaches 2 GB in size. The file will automatically be saved,
and recording will end.
Depending on the manufacturer or model, some CompactFlash cards may not be
capable of successful recording or playback on the R-1.
Micro Drives cannot be used. If you inadvertently use a Micro Drive, we can take
no responsibility for any damage or malfunctions that may occur to the Micro
Drive or to the R-1.
Deutsch
•
English
Types of CompactFlash that you can use
930
* Never insert or remove a CompactFlash card while this unit’s power is on. Doing so may
corrupt the unit’s data or the data on the CompactFlash card.
931
* Carefully insert the CompactFlash card all the way in-until it is firmly in place.
Français
Recordable times on a CompactFlash card
The following table shows the approximate lengths of time you can record using
CompactFlash cards.
Recordable times (approximate)
3
5
26
32
43
52
65
86
130
2 GB
125
188
831
1,039
1,386
1,663
2,079
2,772
4,158
Italiano
WAV, 16 bit/44.1 kHz
MP3, 16 bit/320 kbps
MP3, 16 bit/256 kbps
MP3, 16 bit/192 kbps
MP3, 16 bit/160 kbps
MP3, 16 bit/128 kbps
MP3, 16 bit/ 96 kbps
MP3, 16 bit/ 64 kbps
64 MB
Español
File type
WAV, 24 bit/44.1 kHz
Units: minutes
CompactFlash size
256 MB
512 MB
15
31
23
47
102
208
128
260
170
346
205
416
256
520
341
693
512
1,040
* The recording times listed above are approximate. The actual length of time you are able to
record may be slightly different than shown here, so please allow some leeway in your
recording plans.
* Use the R-1 itself to format the CompactFlash card.
* Use the included AC adaptor when recording continuously for an extended time.
* If there are multiple files, the total time that can actually be recorded will be less than the
time shown above.
* The R-1 can handle up to 255 files. Once the number of files in the CompactFlash card
reaches 255, you won’t be able to make any more recordings.
25
R-1_egfis1.book 26 ページ 2005年1月20日 木曜日 午前9時45分
Getting ready to use the R-1
Inserting and removing a card
fig.CFslot
Inserting
1
Turn off the power of the R-1.
2
Open the memory card slot cover,
and insert the CompactFlash card with
its back side facing upward.
Push the CompactFlash card all the way
into the slot.
3
Close the memory card slot cover.
* With a CompactFlash card, the reverse side
is the side that has a raised lip when you’re
looking at the edge not containing the
terminals.
To insert a CompactFlash card, position it
so its reverse side faces upwards, and gently
push the card into the slot. If you attempt to
forcibly insert the card in the wrong
direction, you may damage the R-1 or the
CompactFlash card. Please use caution.
With the back of the
CompactFlash card
facing upward, push
it all the way into the
slot
Insert this way
Removing
fig.CFslot2
1
2
3
26
Turn off the power of the R-1.
Open the memory card slot cover.
Push the eject button and remove the
CompactFlash card.
Push the eject button
R-1_egfis1.book 27 ページ 2005年1月20日 木曜日 午前9時45分
Getting ready to use the R-1
Formatting a CompactFlash card
1
English
You must format a CompactFlash card before you can use it with the R-1.
You must use the R-1 itself to format the CompactFlash card. Follow the procedure
explained on page 60 of “System settings (Setup mode).”
CompactFlash cards formatted by a device other than the R-1 may not work correctly
with the R-1.
Turn off the power of the R-1.
2
Insert the CompactFlash card into the R-1’s memory card slot.
fig.startup.epsfig.no-song.eps
3
4
Deutsch
Turn on the power of the R-1.
If the CompactFlash card contains
no songs (files) that the R-1 is able
to play, the display will indicate No
Song. If the card contains songs
(files), the play mode screen will
appear.
Français
Press the MENU button.
* If you decide to cancel the procedure,
press the EXIT button. You will
return to the previous screen.
fig.format-disp.eps
5
Turn the VALUE dial to select 12
Format Card.
6
Italiano
Press the ENTER button.
fig.format.eps
7
When the display shown here
appears, press the ENTER button.
fig.sure.eps
The screen will ask you to confirm
that you really want to format the
card. To format the card, press the
ENTER button.
Español
8
* If you decide not to format the card, press the EXIT button. You will return to step 5.
Never remove the CompactFlash card while formatting is in progress. Doing
so may damage the CompactFlash card.
fig.complete.eps
Formatting is completed when the
display indicates Completed!
9
Press the MENU button.
You will return to the main screen (play mode).
27
R-1_egfis1.book 28 ページ 2005年1月20日 木曜日 午前9時45分
Getting ready to use the R-1
Types of files that the R-1 can handle
The R-1 can handle the following types of files.
Choose the type of file that is appropriate for your needs, depending on whether audio
quality or recording time is more important for your situation.
MP3
Playback
Recording
WAV
Playback
Recording
Sampling frequency (kHz)
8, 11.025, 16, 22.050, 24, 32, 44.1, 48
* All converted to 44.1 kHz for
playback
44.1
Sampling frequency (kHz)
8, 11.025, 16, 22.050, 24, 32, 44.1, 48
* All converted to 44.1 kHz for
playback
44.1
Bit rate (kbps)
8, 16, 24, 32, 40, 48, 56, 64, 80, 96,
112, 128, 144, 160, 192, 224, 256,
320, VBR
64, 96, 128, 160, 192, 256, 320
bit depth (bits)
8, 16, 24
16, 24
* Recording is always in stereo.
WAV files are not compressed; they capture all of the information in the recorded
sound. This means that they will have better audio quality than MP3 files. However,
WAV files are also much larger than MP3 files.
What is Bit Rate?
Bit Rate indicates the speed at which data is transferred. This is given in units
of “bps” (bits per second). Higher bit rates will deliver better audio quality. A
higher bit rate conveys more information, meaning that the sound will be
represented more accurately; but this also means that the file size will increase.
With a lower bit rate, the audio quality will be lower but the file size will also
be smaller.
What is VBR?
VBR stands for Variable Bit Rate. This means that the bit rate is varied according
to the type of sound at each moment in the recording. A higher bit rate is used
when there is a larger amount of sonic information to be captured, and a lower
bit rate is used when there is a lesser amount.
28
R-1_egfis1.book 29 ページ 2005年1月20日 木曜日 午前9時45分
Basic recording methods
The following table shows the approximate lengths of time you can record using
CompactFlash cards.
Recordable times (approximate)
English
Recordable times on a CompactFlash card
Units: minutes
CompactFlash size
64 MB
3
5
26
32
43
52
65
MP3, 16 bit/ 96 kbps
MP3, 16 bit/ 64 kbps
86
130
256 MB
15
23
102
128
170
205
256
341
512
512 MB
31
47
208
260
346
416
520
693
1,040
2 GB
125
188
831
1,039
1,386
1,663
2,079
2,772
4,158
Deutsch
File type
WAV, 24 bit/44.1 kHz
WAV, 16 bit/44.1 kHz
MP3, 16 bit/320 kbps
MP3, 16 bit/256 kbps
MP3, 16 bit/192 kbps
MP3, 16 bit/160 kbps
MP3, 16 bit/128 kbps
* The recording times listed above are approximate. The actual length of time you are able to record
may be slightly different than shown here, so please allow some leeway in your recording plans.
Français
* Use the R-1 itself to format the CompactFlash card.
* Use the included AC adaptor when recording continuously for an extended time.
* If there are multiple files, the total time that can actually be recorded will be less than the time
shown above.
Recording with the internal microphone
If you want to use the internal microphone,
don’t connect anything to the mic input jack or
line input jack.
If a microphone or cable is connected to the mic
input jack or line input jack, these inputs will
take priority, and the internal microphone will
not be used.
1
L
R
Español
The R-1’s internal microphone is stereo. Audio entering
the microphone at the right side of the R-1 is recorded
on the right (R) channel, while the audio picked up by
the left microphone is recorded on the left (L) channel.
Italiano
fig.mic-LR.eps
Make sure that the R-1’s power is turned off. Also set the input volume to the
minimum position.
If you want to hear (monitor) the sound while recording from the internal
microphone, connect a set of headphones to the phones jack and use them for
monitoring. If you connect external speakers and attempt to use them for
monitoring, acoustic feedback will occur, so don’t attempt to monitor through
speakers.
29
R-1_egfis1.book 30 ページ 2005年1月20日 木曜日 午前9時45分
Basic recording methods
2
3
4
5
Turn on the R-1’s power as described in “Connecting the AC adaptor and
turning on the power” (p. 19).
If you're recording via the internal microphone, set the mic type select switch to DYN.
Refer to “Types of files that the R-1 can handle” (p. 28), and specify the type of
file that you want to record. To make your selection or to check the current
selection, use Setup mode 07 Record Mode (p. 54).
Adjust the input level as follows.
Adjusting the input level
fig.rec-1.eps
1. Press the REC button.
The R-1 enters recordingstandby mode. The display
indicates the remaining amount
of time that the R-1 can record for
the type of file (recording quality) you’ve selected.
Remaining recording time
* The song name shown in Record Standby mode is the name of the file that will be newly
created when recording is finished.
fig.rec-2.eps
2. Press the DISPLAY button.
3. Play (or perform) the sounds
that you actually intend to
record, and position the R-1’s internal microphone where it can pick up the sound.
* If you want to apply an effect to the sound while you record it, adjust the input level while
the effect is turned on (i.e., applied).
fig.rec-3.eps
4. While the sound plays,
gradually increase the input
volume.
Adjust the level so that the ■
B
input level indicators shown in
the display do not reach the righmost ■. (Position A in the above illustration)
If the recording level is too low, you won’t be able to record very soft sounds. If the
recording level is too high, loud sounds will be distorted, causing crackles in the
recorded sound.
* If the material you are recording occasionally contains sudden loud sounds, such as the
attack of a drum in a band performance or sudden laughter during a quiet conversation, we
recommend that you use the Limiter (06 Limiter, p. 54). When doing so, adjust the input
level appropriately for the principal type of sound you are recording—not for the sudden
loud sounds that sometimes occur.
When you use the Limiter, the input level is automatically adjusted so that the audio input
level doesn’t get excessively high. When using the Limiter, you should adjust the input level
so that the ■ symbol at the B position in the illustration appears only occasionally.
30
A
R-1_egfis1.book 31 ページ 2005年1月20日 木曜日 午前9時45分
Basic recording methods
fig.rec-time.eps
6
Press the REC button.
Elapsed time from
start of recording
If you move the input volume control in Record Standby mode or during
recording, the input level will change. Be careful that you don’t operate the
input volume control inadvertently. Even if the HOLD switch is ON, the
input volume is not affected by the HOLD function.
When you’re finished recording, press the STOP button.
Deutsch
7
If you want to pause recording, press the PLAY/PAUSE button. To defeat pause
and resume recording, press the PLAY/PAUSE button again.
The recorded data will be saved as a file on the CompactFlash card. The display will
indicate the file name of the recorded data, and that file will be selected.
Français
* The file name is created automatically, using this format: R1_0001.MP3. The 0001 portion
will be the number that follows the highest-numbered file existing on the CompactFlash
card.
* The file is created at the root level of the CompactFlash card. Folders (directories) are not
created.
* Since the R-1 does not contain an internal clock, all files will have a creation date of January
1, 2002.
Italiano
To listen to the data you just recorded, press the PLAY/PAUSE button. For other
playback methods, refer to “Playback methods” (p. 38).
How the input level meter indicates the signal level
Number of ■’s
None
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
∞
-50.0
-40.0
-36.0
-33.0
-30.0
-27.0
-24.0
dB
––
––
––
––
––
––
––
––
-50.0
-40.0
-36.0
-33.0
-30.0
-27.0
-24.0
-21.0
Number of ■’s
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
-21.0
-18.0
-15.0
-12.0
-9.0
-6.0
-3.0
0.0
dB
––
––
––
––
––
––
––
––
-18.0
-15.0
-12.0
-9.0
-6.0
-3.0
0.0
(Clip)
Español
8
English
Recording will begin.
* You can also start recording by pressing
the PLAY/PAUSE button.
31
R-1_egfis1.book 32 ページ 2005年1月20日 木曜日 午前9時45分
Basic recording methods
Recording with an external microphone
The R-1 can use dynamic microphones and the miniature plug-in powered condenser
microphones that are designed to be connected to the recording jack of an MD (Mini
Disc) recorder or the microphone jack of a computer.
If you use a condenser microphone, you must use one that is designed for
plug-in power. If you connect the wrong type of microphone or a conventional
stereo mini-plug microphone, your equipment may be damaged.
fig.conmic-LR.eps
L
R
MIC
Stereo mic
MIC TYPE
INPUT LEVEL
1
Make sure that the R-1’s power is turned off. Set the input volume to the
minimum position.
If anything is connected to the line input jack, the input from the mic input
jack will be ignored. If you want to record via the mic input jack, don’t
connect anything to the line input jack.
2
3
4
32
Turn on the R-1’s power as described in “Connecting the AC adaptor and
turning on the power” (p. 19).
Specify the type of file you want to record, as described in “Types of files that the
R-1 can handle” (p. 28). You can use Setup mode 07 Record Mode (p. 54) to
specify the desired setting or to check the current setting.
Set the mic type select switch appropriately for the type of microphone you’ve
connected to the mic input jack. -> “Mic type select switch” (p. 15)
R-1_egfis1.book 33 ページ 2005年1月20日 木曜日 午前9時45分
Basic recording methods
5
Connect your external microphone to the mic input jack.
6
English
If you want to hear (monitor) the sound while recording, connect a set of
headphones to the phones jack and use them for monitoring. If you connect
external speakers and attempt to use them for monitoring, acoustic feedback
will occur, so don’t attempt to monitor through speakers.
Adjust the input level as follows.
Adjusting the input level
fig.rec-1.eps
The R-1 enters recordingstandby mode. The display
indicates the remaining amount
of time that the R-1 can record for
the type of file (recording quality) you’ve selected.
Deutsch
1. Press the REC button.
Remaining recording time
* The song name shown in Record Standby mode is the name of the file that will be newly
created when recording is finished.
Français
fig.rec-2.eps
2. Press the DISPLAY button.
3. Play (or perform) the sounds
that you actually intend to
record, and position your external microphone where it can pick up the sound.
* If you want to apply an effect to the sound while you record it, adjust the input level while
the effect is turned on (i.e., applied).
fig.rec-3.eps
A
Español
volume.
Adjust the level so that the ■
input level indicators shown in
B
the display do not reach the
rightmost ■. (Position A in the above illustration)
If the recording level is too low, you won’t be able to record very soft sounds. If the
recording level is too high, loud sounds will be distorted, causing crackles in the
recorded sound.
Italiano
4. Gradually increase the input
* If the material you are recording occasionally contains sudden loud sounds, such as the
attack of a drum in a band performance or sudden laughter during a quiet conversation, we
recommend that you use the Limiter (06 Limiter, p. 54).When doing so, adjust the input
level appropriately for the principal type of sound you are recording—not for the sudden
loud sounds that sometimes occur.
When you use the Limiter, the input level is automatically adjusted so that the audio input
level doesn’t get excessively high. When using the Limiter, you should adjust the input level
so that the ■ symbol at the B position in the illustration appears only occasionally.
33
R-1_egfis1.book 34 ページ 2005年1月20日 木曜日 午前9時45分
Basic recording methods
fig.rec-time.eps
7
Press the REC button.
Recording will begin.
* You can also start recording by pressing
the PLAY/PAUSE button.
Elapsed time from
start of recording
If you move the input volume control in Record Standby mode or during
recording, the input level will change. Be careful that you don’t operate the
input volume control inadvertently. Even if the HOLD switch is ON, the
input volume is not affected by the HOLD function.
8
When you’re finished recording, press the STOP button.
If you want to pause recording, press the PLAY/PAUSE button. To defeat pause
and resume recording, press the PLAY/PAUSE button again.
The recorded data will be saved as a file on the CompactFlash card. The display will
indicate the file name of the recorded data, and that file will be selected.
* The file name is created automatically, using this format: R1_0001.MP3. The 0001 portion
will be the number that follows the highest-numbered file existing on the CompactFlash
card.
* The file is created at the root level of the CompactFlash card. Folders (directories) are not
created.
9
To listen to the data you just recorded, press the PLAY/PAUSE button. For other
playback methods, refer to “Playback methods” (p. 38).
How the input level meter indicates the signal level
Number of ■’s
None
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
34
∞
-50.0
-40.0
-36.0
-33.0
-30.0
-27.0
-24.0
dB
––
––
––
––
––
––
––
––
-50.0
-40.0
-36.0
-33.0
-30.0
-27.0
-24.0
-21.0
Number of ■’s
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
-21.0
-18.0
-15.0
-12.0
-9.0
-6.0
-3.0
0.0
dB
––
––
––
––
––
––
––
––
-18.0
-15.0
-12.0
-9.0
-6.0
-3.0
0.0
(Clip)
R-1_egfis1.book 35 ページ 2005年1月20日 木曜日 午前9時45分
Basic recording methods
Recording from a cassette tape or CD
English
This section explain how to record audio from an external device via the line input jack.
* The R-1 does not have a digital input jack.
As an example, here’s how to record from a CD player into the R-1.
fig.cd
Deutsch
LINE IN
LINE OUT
Français
CD/MD player, cassette deck, etc.
The microphone input is disabled if you connect a device or cable to the line
input jack. This means that you cannot record the microphone input and line
input mixed together. If something is connected to both the line input jack and
the mic input jack, only the sound entering the line input jack will be recorded.
3
4
5
Italiano
2
Make sure that the R-1’s power is turned off. Set the input volume to the
minimum position.
Turn on the R-1’s power as described in “Connecting the AC adaptor and
turning on the power” (p. 19).
Specify the type of file you want to record, as described in “Types of files that the
R-1 can handle” (p. 28). You can use Setup mode 07 Record Mode (p. 54) to
specify the desired setting or to check the current setting.
Español
1
Use an audio cable to connect the output jacks of your CD player to the R-1’s line
input jack.
On your CD player, play back the song that you want to record and adjust the
input level as described below. -> “Adjusting the input level” (p. 36)
35
R-1_egfis1.book 36 ページ 2005年1月20日 木曜日 午前9時45分
Basic recording methods
Adjusting the input level
fig.rec-1.eps
1. Press the REC button.
The R-1 enters recordingstandby mode. The display
indicates the remaining amount
of time that the R-1 can record for
the type of file (recording quality) you’ve selected.
Remaining recording time
* The song name shown in Record Standby mode is the name of the file that will be newly
created when recording is finished.
fig.rec-2.eps
2. Press the DISPLAY button.
3. On the device that’s connected to the line input jack, play back the sounds that
you want to record. In this example, play back a CD on your CD player.
* If you want to apply an effect to the sound while you record it, adjust the input level while
the effect is turned on (i.e., applied).
fig.rec-3.eps
4. Gradually increase the input
volume.
Adjust the level so that the ■
input level indicators shown in
B
A
the display do not reach the
rightmost ■. (Position A in the above illustration)
If the recording level is too low, you won’t be able to record very soft sounds. If the
recording level is too high, loud sounds will be distorted, causing crackles in the
recorded sound.
If the sound still distorts or is too soft even after you’ve used the R-1’s
input volume control to adjust the input level, try adjusting the volume
of your CD player or other playback device.
* If the material you are recording occasionally contains sudden loud sounds, we recommend
that you use the Limiter (06 Limiter, p. 54). When doing so, adjust the input level
appropriately for the principal type of sound you are recording—not for the sudden loud
sounds that sometimes occur.
When you use the Limiter, the input level is automatically adjusted so that the audio input
level doesn’t get excessively high. When using the Limiter, you should adjust the input level
so that the ■ symbol at the B position in the illustration appears only occasionally.
If you're recording music from a CD, it's convenient to use the track splitting
function (08 Track Splitting, p. 54). The R-1 will detect the silences between
songs, and will create separate files for each song.
36
R-1_egfis1.book 37 ページ 2005年1月20日 木曜日 午前9時45分
Basic recording methods
fig.rec-time.eps
6
Press the REC button.
Elapsed time from
start of recording
7
Deutsch
If you move the input volume control in Record Standby mode or during
recording, the input level will change. Be careful that you don’t operate the
input volume control inadvertently. Even if the HOLD switch is ON, the
input volume is not affected by the HOLD function.
Press the Play button of your CD player.
8
When you’re finished recording, press the R-1’s STOP button.
Français
If you want to pause recording, press the PLAY/PAUSE button. To defeat pause
and resume recording, press the PLAY/PAUSE button again.
The recorded data will be saved as a file on the CompactFlash card. The display will
indicate the file name of the recorded data, and that file will be selected.
* The file name is created automatically, using this format: R1_0001.MP3. The 0001 portion
will be the number that follows the highest-numbered file existing on the CompactFlash
card.
* The file is created at the root level of the CompactFlash card. Folders (directories) are not
created.
Italiano
10
Press the Stop button of your CD player.
To listen to the data you just recorded, press the PLAY/PAUSE button. For other
playback methods, refer to “Playback methods” (p. 38).
How the input level meter indicates the signal level
Number of ■’s
None
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
∞
-50.0
-40.0
-36.0
-33.0
-30.0
-27.0
-24.0
dB
––
––
––
––
––
––
––
––
-50.0
-40.0
-36.0
-33.0
-30.0
-27.0
-24.0
-21.0
Number of ■’s
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
-21.0
-18.0
-15.0
-12.0
-9.0
-6.0
-3.0
0.0
dB
––
––
––
––
––
––
––
––
-18.0
-15.0
-12.0
-9.0
-6.0
-3.0
0.0
(Clip)
Español
9
English
Recording will begin.
* You can also start recording by pressing
the PLAY/PAUSE button.
37
R-1_egfis1.book 38 ページ 2005年1月20日 木曜日 午前9時45分
Playback methods
Normal playback
fig.play-1_50
File name
1
2
The R-1 does not have internal speakers. In order to hear the playback, you’ll need to
provide a set of headphones or speakers.
You can use the R-1’s phones jack as a digital output (optical out) for connection to your
digital audio device, or as a line output for connection to your analog audio device.
Before you continue, make connections using the type of cable appropriate for your
device. Refer to “Connecting headphones” (p. 22), “Connecting digital speakers
(digital devices)” (p. 23), or “Connecting analog speakers (analog devices)” (p. 24).
1
With the display showing an indication like the one in the illustration, turn the
VALUE dial to select a song (file).
Press the PREV button to move to the previous song (file), or the NEXT button
to move to the next song (file).
* If the display indicates No Song, the CompactFlash card contains no files that the R-1 is able
to play.
2
3
38
Press the R-1’s PLAY button (
begin playing.
); the song (file) shown in the display will
Gradually turn the output volume control toward the right to adjust the volume
to a comfortable listening level.
R-1_egfis1.book 39 ページ 2005年1月20日 木曜日 午前9時45分
Playback methods
* The song name shown in the display is the name of the file. It does not correspond to the ID3
tag within the MP3 file.
English
* Song names are displayed in alphabetical order according to the following list of characters;
they are not displayed in the order in which they were recorded.
(space) ! # $ % & ‘ ( ) + , - . 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ; = @
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz
* If the CompactFlash card contains sub-directories (folders), all files at the root level will be
displayed first, followed by the files in the sub-directories (folders).
* Filenames beginning with “.” are ignored and will not be displayed.
* Files with extensions other than .mp3 and .wav are ignored and will not be displayed.
Deutsch
For more about the files that the R-1 is able to record and play back, refer to
“Types of files that the R-1 can handle” (p. 28).
Rewinding or fast-forwarding during playback
Français
This is a note of caution regarding operations while playing 16-bit/24-bit WAV files.
Español
Italiano
With some types of CompactFlash cards, performing fast-forward or rewind operations
while playing back these files will exceed the maximum speed at which data can be
read, causing the fast-forward or rewind operation to halt.
If this occurs, press the Stop button to stop playback. Then, start playback again.
39
R-1_egfis1.book 40 ページ 2005年1月20日 木曜日 午前9時45分
Playback methods
REPEAT A-B (Repeat playback)
This function lets you specify a region of the song during playback, causing it to play repeatedly.
fig.repeat-disp_50
Procedure
1
During playback, press the REPEAT
button (
) once.
That location will be assigned as the
beginning of the repetition (point A).
2
Song
A
Press the REPEAT button once
again. That location will be assigned
as the end of the repetition (point B).
fig.repeat-a
A
B
A
B
Song
The region you specified in steps 1
and 2 (the region between points A
and B) will play back repeatedly.
To cancel repeat play, press the
REPEAT button once again.
40
Song
R-1_egfis1.book 41 ページ 2005年1月20日 木曜日 午前9時45分
Playback methods
Notes
English
* If after specifying point A, you press the STOP button before specifying point B, the point
A setting will be cancelled.
* If after specifying point A you allow playback to continue all the way to the end of the song,
playback will repeat between point A and the end of the song.
* If you press the STOP button during repeat play, playback will stop and the repeat region
(A-B) settings will be cancelled.
Français
•
Italiano
•
With points A and B specified, pressing the REPEAT button (
) will cancel the
settings for points A and B.
If after specifying point A, you press the STOP button before specifying point B,
the point A setting will be cancelled.
If you want to stop playback as well as cancel the repeat settings, press the STOP
button. Playback will stop, and the repeat playback settings (points A and B) will
also be cancelled.
Español
•
Deutsch
To cancel this function
41
R-1_egfis1.book 42 ページ 2005年1月20日 木曜日 午前9時45分
Playback methods
1/2 PLAY (Half-speed playback)
Here’s how you can play back at half the normal speed.
fig.half-disp_50
Procedure
1
While stopped or playing, press the
SPEED button.
The lower line of the display will
indicate 1/2, and playback will occur at half-speed.
If the R-1 is currently playing, the playback will slow down.
If the R-1 is currently stopped, half-speed playback will begin when you press the
PLAY button.
* This function adjusts the pitch of the half-speed playback so that it remains the same as the
normal pitch. This may produce a wavering effect in the playback; this is not a malfunction.
To cancel this function
If half-speed playback is active, press the SPEED button to cancel it.
If you don’t cancel half-speed playback, the next song will also play back at
half-speed.
42
R-1_egfis1.book 43 ページ 2005年1月20日 木曜日 午前9時45分
Playback methods
PLAY MODE (Playback mode)
Here you can specify the order and method of playback.
Deutsch
English
fig.disp-play_50
2, 4
1, 6
1
Français
3, 5
Press the MENU button.
You can’t change the play mode while the R-1 is playing.
You must first press the STOP button to stop playback.
4
Italiano
3
Use the VALUE dial to select 05 Play Mode.
Press the ENTER button.
Use the VALUE dial to select the play mode you want.
Sequential
Single
Shuffle
Songs will play back in the order of 001, 002, 003...009
* Use the PREV and NEXT buttons or the VALUE dial to select a file (song).
Only the selected file (song) will be played repeatedly.
The song playback order will change automatically.
* A previously played song will not be played.
* If you use the PREV / NEXT buttons or the VALUE dial to select a file (song),
the file (song) names will appear in the same order as when Sequential play
mode is selected.
Español
2
fig.sequential.eps
5
6
After you’ve selected the play mode
you want, press the ENTER button.
Press the MENU button.
You will return to play mode.
43
R-1_egfis1.book 44 ページ 2005年1月20日 木曜日 午前9時45分
Using the R-1 with your computer
The R-1 can handle the following types of files.
MP3
Playback
Recording
WAV
Playback
Recording
Sampling frequency (kHz)
8, 11.025, 16, 22.050, 24, 32, 44.1, 48
* All converted to 44.1 kHz for
playback
44.1
Sampling frequency (kHz)
8, 11.025, 16, 22.050, 24, 32, 44.1, 48
* All converted to 44.1 kHz for
playback
44.1
Bit rate (kbps)
8, 16, 24, 32, 40, 48, 56, 64, 80, 96,
112, 128, 144, 160, 192, 224, 256, 320,
VBR
64, 96, 128, 160, 192, 256, 320
bit depth (bits)
8, 16, 24
16, 24
Connecting the R-1 to your computer
Use the AC adaptor when connecting the R-1 to your computer.
* When connecting the R-1 to your computer via a USB cable, you must use the AC adaptor
to prevent the batteries from running down while connected.
1
2
3
Insert a CompactFlash card into the R-1.
If the R-1’s power switch is off, turn it on.
Use a USB cable to connect the R-1 to your computer.
The R-1 will be detected by your computer.
If no CompactFlash card is inserted in the R-1 when you connect it to your
computer, the R-1’s display will indicate No Card. In this case, the R-1 will
not be detected by your computer. Your computer will also fail to detect the
R-1 if the R-1 is in Setup mode. Unplug the USB cable that connects the R-1
to your computer, return to step 1 of this procedure, and insert the
CompactFlash card.
The R-1’s CompactFlash card will be recognized by your computer as follows.
Windows
Mac OS X
Mac OS 9
When the card is recognized by My Computer or Explorer, it will appear with
the name Removable Disk.
The card will appear on the desktop with a name of NO NAME.
The card will appear on the desktop with a name of Untitled.
* If you change the above name after the card has been recognized by your computer, it will
subsequently appear with the name you specified.
* If you're using Mac OS 9, format the CompactFlash card on your Macintosh, and then reformat it on the R-1.
4
Now you can copy the desired files from the R-1’s CompactFlash card to your
computer, or from your computer to the R-1’s CompactFlash card.
You can copy files by dragging and dropping them.
44
R-1_egfis1.book 45 ページ 2005年1月20日 木曜日 午前9時45分
Using the R-1 with your computer
Disconnecting the R-1 from your computer
English
Here’s how to disconnect the R-1 from your computer. You must use the following
procedure to cancel the connection, and then disconnect the USB cable.
Do not switch off power to the R-1, disconnect the USB cable, or remove the
CompactFlash card while the R-1 is still connected to your computer.
Windows
In the Windows task tray, double-click the Safely Remove Hardware icon (
).
Deutsch
1
The Safely Remove Hardware dialog box will appear.
2
In the displayed list of hardware devices, select the item that indicates the R-1’s
CompactFlash card.
Item indicating the R-1’s CompactFlash card
4
5
In the dialog box, click [Stop].
When the Stop Hardware Device dialog box appears, select the item that indicates
the R-1’s CompactFlash card, and click [OK].
When your computer indicates “The USB Mass Storage Device can be
removed safely,” you can disconnect the USB cable between the R-1 and your
computer. Alternatively, you can switch off power to the R-1.
Italiano
3
USB Mass Storage Device
Removable Disk
Français
Windows XP, 2000
Windows Me
Macintosh
Cancel the connection with the R-1 displayed on the desktop.
Español
1
In Mac OS X, drag the R-1’s CompactFlash icon (NO NAME) to the
of the
dock.
Normally, when you drag to the trash can located at the right edge of the dock, the
indication will change from the trash can to
, allowing you to cancel the
connection.
In Mac OS 9, drag the R-1’s CompactFlash icon (untitled) to the trash.
2
When the icon has disappeared from the desktop, you can disconnect the USB
cable between the R-1 and your computer. Alternatively, you can switch off power
to the R-1.
45
R-1_egfis1.book 46 ページ 2005年1月20日 木曜日 午前9時45分
Using effects
What are effects?
In the context of a digital audio device such as the R-1, “effects” are digital processing
techniques that can be applied to a sound to modify it; for example, by making it
brighter or giving it more impact. You can also make speech more intelligible, or reduce
unwanted noise.
The R-1 provides various effects, which are listed on the pages that follow. You can
apply an effect to the input sound and record the processed sound, or apply an effect to
the sound that is being played back by the R-1.
If you apply effects while recording, the volume and tonal character of the recorded
sound will differ from the original sound. Particularly if you are applying an
“aggressive” effect, you should use headphones to monitor the sound while still in the
recording-standby mode to make sure that the sound is not clipping or distorting. We
also recommend that you make a test recording beforehand.
Clipping
Clipping occurs when an effect or amplification causes the audio level
(volume) to exceed the maximum level that a device can handle. This will
cause distortion or a “buzzy” sound during loud passages.
For details on how to make effect settings, refer to “Applying an effect” (p. 52).
If you press the EFFECT button during recording or playback, the effect will
be switched on or off. To prevent the effect from being switched on or off
unintentionally, we recommend that you turn the HOLD switch on.
46
R-1_egfis1.book 47 ページ 2005年1月20日 木曜日 午前9時45分
Using effects
03
Voice Perform
04
Editable EQ
05
Noise Reducer
06
Hum Noise
Cut
07
Reverb
08
Int-Mic Rec.
09
Ext-Mic Rec.
p. 49
Deutsch
For Speech
p. 49
p. 49
Français
02
p. 49
p. 49
p. 50
Italiano
Easy EQ
p. 50
p. 50
Español
01
Eleven settings are provided for use with styles such as rock, pop, or
dance. Each setting modifies the tonal character (frequency response)
appropriately for the selected style of music. For example, the Rock
setting boosts the low and high frequency ranges to give the sound
greater impact. The Pop setting makes it easier to hear the range in
which the melody is usually played. The Vocal setting makes the lyrics
more audible. The Flat setting simply outputs the sound without any
change in tonal character.
Internally, this effect uses a ten-band graphic equalizer.
This effect is appropriate for material that is mainly a speaking voice,
such as conversation or dialog. It clarifies the voice, and also reduces
the sibilance (unpleasant exaggeration of sounds beginning with “s”)
that can occur when recording with a microphone.
Internally, this effect combines a de-esser and an enhancer.
This effect can completely transform the character of a voice by modifying the pitch of the sound. You can use the provided settings to create comical voices, low monster-like voices, or voices that have a
“springy” character.
Internally, this combines a pitch shifter and a delay.
This is a ten-band graphic equalizer with adjustable gain. For each
band, you can adjust the gain in a range of -12 dB– +12 dB to modify
the tonal character of the sound.
This effect reduces the “hissing” or “rushing” background noise that
may be heard during silent portions of a recording, or the hiss that is
often heard on an analog record or cassette tape.
Internally, this combines a noise gate and a notch filter.
This effect reduces the low-pitched “hum” that can occur when recording from a microphone or when a motorized device is located
nearby.
Internally, this is a notch filter.
When you listen to sound, you are hearing not only the sound that
comes directly from the source to your ears, but also the sound that reflects off the floor and walls. These reflections are called “reverberation” (reverb), and their character will vary depending on the size of
the room and the material of which the walls are constructed.
This effect adds simulated reverberation to the original sound, producing a natural-sounding impression of spaciousness.
This effect modifies the character of the sound recorded from the internal mic or a miniature condenser mic connected to the mic input
jack, giving it the character of sound recorded from a larger mic. It can
simulate the characteristics of famous mics used in recording studios,
giving your sound a professional touch.
This effect is particularly useful when applied during recording.
This effect modifies the character of the sound recorded from a typical
small dynamic mic connected to the mic input jack, giving it the character of sound recorded from a larger mic. It can simulate the characteristics of famous mics used in recording studios, giving your sound
a professional touch.
This effect is particularly useful when applied during recording.
English
Effect list
p. 50
47
R-1_egfis1.book 48 ページ 2005年1月20日 木曜日 午前9時45分
Using effects
48
10
Mastering
11
Center Cancel
12
Tuner
13
Metronome
You may sometimes feel that the material you record is lacking in definition or clarity. Also in some cases, there may be excessive volume
differences between loud and soft passages, or it may be difficult to
hear soft sounds that occur simultaneously with loud sounds. For example when recording your band performance, there might be an excessive difference in volume between the intro and the break. Or when
recording conversation, there will be a difference in volume between
someone near the mic and someone farther from the mic.
The Mastering effect processes such sounds to give them better definition and a more consistent volume.
You can also use this to enhance the playback of material you’ve already recorded on the R-1, or to enhance material as you’re recording
it into the R-1 from media such as cassette tape.
Internally, this combines an enhancer and a two-band (low and high)
compressor.
This effect cancels the sounds that are located at the center of a stereorecorded song. You can use this to remove the vocal from a song, leaving only the accompaniment. However this will not be as effective if
special effects have been used to create a broader stereo field or if the
recording contains a large amount of reverberation.
The tuner is a useful tool for use with a musical instrument; it is not an
“effect” that modifies the original sound. This produces a sine wave of
a fixed pitch at the notes C, D, E, ... relative to A=440 Hz. You can use
this reference pitch when tuning your musical instrument.
Internally, this is a fixed-pitch oscillator. Even if you record while the
tuner is sounding, the sound of the tuner will not be recorded.
The metronome is a useful tool for use with a musical instrument; it is
not an “effect” that modifies the original sound. You can specify the
time signature and the tempo of the metronome.
Even if you record while the metronome is sounding, the sound of the
metronome will not be recorded.
p. 50
p. 51
p. 51
p. 51
R-1_egfis1.book 49 ページ 2005年1月20日 木曜日 午前9時45分
Using effects
01: Easy EQ
Range of values
Flat, Rock, Pop,
Dance, HipHop,
Techno, Jazz, Blues,
Classic, Speech, Vocal
0–80–100
Explanation
Parameter name
De-eser Sw.
Range of values
OFF, ON
Explanation
Switches the de-eser (sibilant reduction) on/off.
Clarity
1–50–100
Low Gain
High Gain
Level
-12dB–0dB–+12dB
-12dB–0dB–+12dB
0–80–100
Adjusts the amount of clarification applied to the
sound.
Adjusts the low-range gain.
Adjusts the high-range gain.
Adjusts the output volume.
Range of values
High Tone, Low
Tone, Spring, Spacy
Explanation
Selects the type of transformation applied to the
sound.
-12dB–0dB–+12dB
-12dB–0dB–+12dB
L50–CENTER–R50
0–80–100
Adjusts the low-range gain.
Adjusts the high-range gain.
Adjusts the panning of the output sound.
Adjusts the output volume.
Range of values
-12dB–0dB–+12dB
-12dB–0dB–+12dB
-12dB–0dB–+12dB
-12dB–0dB–+12dB
-12dB–0dB–+12dB
-12dB–0dB–+12dB
-12dB–0dB–+12dB
-12dB–0dB–+12dB
-12dB–0dB–+12dB
-12dB–0dB–+12dB
Explanation
Adjusts the gain at 32 Hz.
Adjusts the gain at 64 Hz.
Adjusts the gain at 125 Hz.
Adjusts the gain at 250 Hz.
Adjusts the gain at 500 Hz.
Adjusts the gain at 1 kHz.
Adjusts the gain at 2 kHz.
Adjusts the gain at 4 kHz.
Adjusts the gain at 8 kHz.
Adjusts the gain at 16 kHz.
Parameter name
Range of values
Noise Gate
0–20–100
Hiss Cut
Low Gain
High Gain
Level
0–80–100
-12dB–0dB–+12dB
-12dB–0dB–+12dB
0–80–100
Explanation
Specifies the threshold level; the sound will be cut
when the volume falls below this level.
Adjusts the amount by which hiss will be cut.
Adjusts the low-range gain.
Adjusts the high-range gain.
Adjusts the output volume.
Type
Level
Selects an EQ preset.
English
Parameter name
Adjusts the output volume.
Deutsch
02: For Speech
Parameter name
Type
Low Gain
High Gain
Pan
Level
Français
03: Voice Perform
64Hz
125Hz
250Hz
500Hz
1kHz
2kHz
4kHz
8kHz
16kHz
Español
Parameter name
32Hz
Italiano
04: Editable EQ
05: Noise Reducer
49
R-1_egfis1.book 50 ページ 2005年1月20日 木曜日 午前9時45分
Using effects
06: Hum Noise Cut
Parameter name
Frequency
Range of values
50Hz, 60Hz
Depth
Low Gain
High Gain
Level
0–80–100
-12dB–0dB–+12dB
-12dB–0dB–+12dB
0–80–100
Explanation
Specifies the frequency at which hum will be cut.
Adjusts the amount by which hum will be cut.
Adjusts the low-range gain.
Adjusts the high-range gain.
Adjusts the output volume.
07: Reverb
Parameter name
Type
Range of values
Hall, Room, Plate
Time
1–50–100
D100:0W–D50:50W–
D0:100W
-12dB–0dB–+12dB
-12dB–0dB–+12dB
0–100
Explanation
Selects the type of reverb.
Adjusts the length of reverberation.
Adjusts the proportion between the original sound
and the reverberation.
Adjusts the low-range gain.
Adjusts the high-range gain.
Adjusts the output volume.
Range of values
1–5
-12dB–0dB–+12dB
-12dB–0dB–+12dB
0–80–100
Explanation
Selects the type of transformation.
Adjusts the low-range gain.
Adjusts the high-range gain.
Adjusts the output volume.
Parameter name
Type
Range of values
1–5
Low Gain
High Gain
Level
-12dB–0dB–+12dB
-12dB–0dB–+12dB
0–80–100
Explanation
Selects the type of transformation.
Adjusts the low-range gain.
Adjusts the high-range gain.
Adjusts the output volume.
Balance
Low Gain
High Gain
Level
08: Int-Mic Rec.
Parameter name
Type
Low Gain
High Gain
Level
09: Ext-Mic Rec.
10: Mastering
50
Parameter name
Range of values
Clarity
1–50–100
Crossover
200Hz, 250Hz, 315Hz,
400Hz, 500Hz, 630Hz,
800Hz, 1kHz, 1.25Hz,
1.6kHz, 2kHz
Low Compress
0–50–100
High Compress
0–50–100
Low Gain
High Gain
Level
-12dB–0dB–+12dB
-12dB–0dB–+12dB
0–80–100
Explanation
Adjusts the amount of clarification applied to the
sound.
Specifies the frequency at which the low- and highrange compressors are divided.
Adjusts the amount of compression for frequencies
below the Crossover point you specified.
Adjusts the amount of compression for frequencies
above the Crossover point you specified.
Adjusts the low-range gain.
Adjusts the high-range gain.
Adjusts the output volume.
R-1_egfis1.book 51 ページ 2005年1月20日 木曜日 午前9時45分
Using effects
11: Center Cancel
Range of values
Depth
0–80–100
Point
L50–CENTER–R50
Ambience
0–20–100
Low Gain
High Gain
Level
-12dB–0dB–+12dB
-12dB–0dB–+12dB
0–80–100
Explanation
Adjusts the amount by which the center sound will
be cut.
Makes a fine adjustment to the stereo position at
which the sound will be cut.
Adjusts the amount of reverberation that will be
added.
Adjusts the low-range gain.
Adjusts the high-range gain.
Adjusts the output volume.
English
Parameter name
Parameter name
Range of values
F, F#, G, G#, A, A#, B,
C, C#, D, D#, E
0–80–100
Explanation
Parameter name
Beat
Range of values
4/4, 6/8, 1/4, 2/4, 3/4
Tempo
30–120–280
Level
0–80–100
Explanation
Specifies the time signature of the metronome.
Specifies the tempo of the metronome.
* The value will change in steps of 2.
Adjusts the volume of the metronome.
Tone (A=440)
Level
Deutsch
12: Tuner
Specifies the pitch of the tuner.
Adjusts the volume of the tuner.
Español
Italiano
Français
13: Metronome
51
R-1_egfis1.book 52 ページ 2005年1月20日 木曜日 午前9時45分
Using effects
Applying an effect
This section explains how to apply an effect during playback or during recordingstandby mode. You can also make effect settings before you begin playback, or try out
various effect settings while making a trial recording.
fig.effect.eps
While playing
In recording-standby
Effect mode ON
3
1
2
Edit mode
Choose an effect
01:Eazy EQ
-> 02:For Speech...
EDIT
EXIT
ENTER
EXIT
ENTER
Select a parameter
Type -> Level1
EDIT
EXIT
ENTER
Edit the parameter
Pop -> Dance
-> HipHop...
EXIT
Exit from
effect edit mode
Begin
playback/recording
52
R-1_egfis1.book 53 ページ 2005年1月20日 木曜日 午前9時45分
Using effects
1. While in playback or in recording-standby mode, press the R-1’s EFFECT button to
turn it on (lit).
2. Press the EDIT button. You will enter Edit mode.
English
3. Use the VALUE dial to select the desired type of effect, and then press the ENTER
button.
Each effect has various “parameters” (settings) that adjust the effect. When you
select an effect type, its parameters will have the default settings.
When you change the effect type, the currently set parameter values are cleared.
* If you decide not to change the effect type, press the EXIT button or the EDIT button to leave
Effect mode.
Deutsch
4. Now you can select a parameter. Use the VALUE dial to select a parameter, and
then press the ENTER button.
* If you decide not to select a parameter, press the EDIT button to leave Effect mode.
* If you want to return to the effect selection, press the EXIT button.
5. Now you can edit the parameter. Use the VALUE dial to specify the desired value
for the parameter, and then press the EXIT button.
Français
6. Press the EDIT button to leave Effect mode.
If you want to return to the parameter selection, press the EXIT button.
Español
Italiano
The effect parameter settings you make are remembered until you change
them.
53
R-1_egfis1.book 54 ページ 2005年1月20日 木曜日 午前9時45分
Various settings
System settings (Setup mode)
For details on how to make these settings, see“Procedures” (p. 56).
* During playback, recording, or recording-standby, you can’t enter Setup mode by pressing
the MENU button.
Menu/Effect
01
02
03
04
05
LCD Contrast
Adjusts the contrast of the display.
LCD Backlight
Specifies the time after which the display backlight will turn off when running on batteries.
Delete File
Deletes a file.
Rename File
Changes the name of a file.
Play Mode
Specifies the order in which songs will play.
Limiter
Turns the input level limiter on/off.
* The limiter reduces the input level appropriately
when the input level is excessive.
06
Value (default
value: boldface)
Procedure
1–5–10
A (p. 56)
OFF, ON, 5sec,
10sec, 20sec
A (p. 56)
––
B (p. 58)
––
C (p. 60)
Sequential,
Single, Shuffle
A (p. 56)
OFF, ON
A (p. 56)
MP3 64kbps,
MP3 96kbps,
MP3 128kbps,
MP3 160kbps,
MP3 192kbps,
MP3 256kbps,
MP3 320kbps,
WAV 16bit,
WAV 24bit
A (p. 56)
OFF, ON
A (p. 56)
OFF, ON
A (p. 56)
The threshold level is -9 dBFS.
07
08
09
54
Record Mode
Specifies the type of file created when you record.
This will determine the audio quality of the recorded file.
Track Splitting
Turns the track splitting function on/off.
* This function automatically divides the file
whenever there is a three-second or longer interval of silence during recording.
Input Monitor
Turn this on if you’re monitoring the input signal
through headphones. Turn this off if you’re not
monitoring the signal.
* During recording, the sound will be heard regardless of whether this is on or off.
R-1_egfis1.book 55 ページ 2005年1月20日 木曜日 午前9時45分
13
14
A (p. 56)
OFF, 1min, 2min,
3min, 5min,
10min, 15min,
30min, 45min,
60min
A (p. 56)
–
D (p. 62)
–
E (p. 64)
–
A (p. 56)
Deutsch
12
STEREO, MONO
Français
11
Procedure
Italiano
10
Input Select
Set this to STEREO if you’ve connected a stereo
microphone. Set this to MONO if you’ve connected a monaural microphone. If you use the STEREO setting with a monaural signal, only the L
(left) channel will be recorded. If this is set to
MONO, sound will be recorded on both the L and
R channels.
* The recorded file will be stereo even if this is set
to MONO.
Sleep Timer
Specifies the time after which the R-1 will enter
Sleep mode when running on batteries.
* This setting does nothing if you’re using the AC
adaptor.
Format Card
Formats a CompactFlash card.
Firmware Ver1.00
Lets you check the program version of the R-1.
About the R-1
Displays information about the R-1.
Value (default
value: boldface)
Español
Menu/Effect
English
Various settings
55
R-1_egfis1.book 56 ページ 2005年1月20日 木曜日 午前9時45分
Various settings
Procedures
Procedure A
01 LCD Contrast
02 LCD Backlight
05 Play Mode
06 Limiter
07 Record Mode
08 Track Splitting
09 Input Monitor
10 Input Select
11 Sleep Timer
14 About the R-1
fig.system.eps
Setup mode
Select an item
from the setup
menu
MENU
EXIT
ENTER
1
EXIT
ENTER
Specify
the value
5 ->6 -> 7...
2
MENU
ENTER
MENU
EXIT
Exit setup mode
56
R-1_egfis1.book 57 ページ 2005年1月20日 木曜日 午前9時45分
Various settings
1. While the R-1 is stopped, press the MENU button. You will enter Setup mode.
2. Turn the VALUE dial to select an item from the setup menu, and then press the
ENTER button.
English
* If you decide not to continue, you can press the EXIT button or MENU button to leave
Setup mode.
3. Now you can specify the value. Turn the VALUE dial to specify the desired value,
and then press the ENTER button.
* If you press the EXIT button, you will return to the setup item selection in step 2. If you
press the MENU button, you will exit Setup mode.
If you press either of these buttons, the value you specified in step 3 will be ignored.
Deutsch
4. The opening screen of Setup mode is displayed. If you want to choose another
setup menu item, use the VALUE dial to select an item from the menu (return to
step 2).
5. If you’re finished with Setup mode, press the EXIT button or MENU button.
Español
Italiano
Français
If you want to continue making changes in Setup mode, press the ENTER button.
You will return to step 3.
If you want to choose another menu item, turn the VALUE dial to select it (instead
of pressing the ENTER button). Make the desired settings for each menu item as
described in “System settings (Setup mode)” (p. 54).
57
R-1_egfis1.book 58 ページ 2005年1月20日 木曜日 午前9時45分
Various settings
Procedure B
03 Delete File
fig.system-b.eps
Setup mode
Select an item
from the setup
menu
MENU
ENTER
EXIT
1
EXIT
ENTER
Select the file
that you want to delete
2
001:R1_0001.MP3...
MENU
EXIT
ENTER
MENU
ENTER
Exit setup mode
MENU
EXIT
Return to Play mode
58
R-1_egfis1.book 59 ページ 2005年1月20日 木曜日 午前9時45分
Various settings
1. In play-standby mode, press the MENU button. You will enter Setup mode.
2. Turn the VALUE dial to select the desired item from the setup menu.
Select 03: Delete File and then press the ENTER button.
English
* If you decide not to continue, you can press the EXIT button or MENU button to leave
Setup mode.
3. Now you can choose the file that you want to delete. Turn the VALUE dial to select
the file that you want to delete, and then press the ENTER button.
* If you press the EXIT button or MENU button, you will exit Setup mode.
* If there is no file to delete, the display will indicate No Song.
4. The display will ask “OK to delete? [ENTER]”
Deutsch
If you’re sure you want to delete the file you selected in step 3, press the ENTER
button.
The display will indicate “Now working...Do not remove card!” and then will
indicate “Completed!”
Français
fig.working-complete
Don’t remove the CompactFlash card while a file is being deleted.
Then you will automatically return to the Setup mode screen.
5. If you’re finished, press the EXIT button or the MENU button.
Español
Italiano
If you want to delete another file, press the ENTER button. You will return to step
3.
If you want to choose another menu item, turn the VALUE dial to select it (instead
of pressing the ENTER button). To make settings for the menu item you select, use
the appropriate procedure as listed in “System settings (Setup mode)” (p. 54).
59
R-1_egfis1.book 60 ページ 2005年1月20日 木曜日 午前9時45分
Various settings
Procedure C
04 Rename File
fig.system-c.eps
Setup mode
Select an item
from the setup
menu
MENU
ENTER
EXIT
1
EXIT
ENTER
3
2
Select the file
that you want to
rename
001:R1_0001.MP3...
MENU
EXIT
ENTER
The filename
extension
is not displayed
MENU
PREV
NEXT
MENU
Move the cursor
to the character
you want to
change
PLAY (insert)
VALUE
STOP (delete)
R1_0001.MP3
-> R5_0001.MP3
PREV
NEXT
Move the cursor to the character ENTER
you want to change
Exit setup mode
MENU
EXIT
Return to Play mode
60
R-1_egfis1.book 61 ページ 2005年1月20日 木曜日 午前9時45分
Various settings
1. With the R-1 stopped, press the MENU button. You will enter Setup mode.
2. Turn the VALUE dial to select the desired item from the setup menu. Select 04:
Rename File and then press the ENTER button.
English
* If you decide not to continue, you can press the EXIT button or MENU button to leave
Setup mode.
3. Now you can choose the file that you want to rename. Turn the VALUE dial to
select the file that you want to rename, and then press the ENTER button.
* You will exit Setup mode if you press the MENU button.
4. Use the PREV and NEXT buttons to move the cursor to a character you want to
change.
PREV button
NEXT button
Result
Moves the cursor left
Moves the cursor right
Button
PLAY button
STOP button
Result
Deutsch
Button
Inserts a character
Deletes a character
* If you press the MENU button, you will leave Setup mode.
Français
5. When you’ve moved the cursor to the location of the character you want to change,
use the VALUE dial to select the desired character for that location.
■ Characters that you can use in a file name
(space) ! # $ % & ‘ ( ) + , - . 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ; = @
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz
Italiano
File names beginning with “.” are ignored by the R-1.
* You will exit Setup mode if you press the MENU button.
6. Move the cursor to the next location at which you want to change the character.
7. When you’ve finished making changes to the file name, press the ENTER button.
The display will indicate Completed!, and then you will automatically return to the
Setup mode screen.
Español
* When you change the name of a file, the playback order will also be affected.
fig.exists.eps_50
If an identically named file already exists, the
screen shown here will appear. You will need
to specify a different name for the file.
8. If you’re finished, press the EXIT button or the MENU button.
If you want to rename another file, press the ENTER button. You will return to step
3. If you want to choose another menu item, turn the VALUE dial to select it
(instead of pressing the ENTER button). To make settings for the menu item you
select, use the appropriate procedure as listed in“System settings (Setup mode)”
(p. 54).
61
R-1_egfis1.book 62 ページ 2005年1月20日 木曜日 午前9時45分
Various settings
Procedure D
12 Format Card
fig.system-d.eps
Setup mode
MENU
EXIT
Select an item
from the setup
menu
1
EXIT
ENTER
MENU
2
ENTER
MENU
EXIT
EXIT
ENTER
Exit setup mode
MENU
EXIT
Return to Play mode
62
R-1_egfis1.book 63 ページ 2005年1月20日 木曜日 午前9時45分
Various settings
1. With the R-1 stopped, press the MENU button.
You will enter Setup mode.
2. Turn the VALUE dial to select the desired item from the setup menu.
Select 12: Format Card and then press the ENTER button.
English
* If you decide not to continue, you can press the EXIT button or MENU button to leave
Setup mode.
3. The display will ask “OK to format? [ENTER].” Press the ENTER button.
* If you press the MENU button, you will exit Setup mode.
4. Then the display will ask “Are You Sure? [ENTER]”
Deutsch
If you’re sure you want to format the card, press the ENTER button.
The display will indicate “Now working...Do not remove card!” and then will
indicate “Completed!”
fig.working-complete
Then you will automatically return to the Setup mode screen.
5. If you’re finished, press the EXIT button or the MENU button.
Español
Italiano
Français
Since formatting the card will delete all of the files, the display will indicate No
Song.
If you want to choose another menu item, turn the VALUE dial to select it (instead
of pressing the ENTER button). To make settings for the menu item you select, use
the appropriate procedure as listed in “System settings (Setup mode)” (p. 54).
63
R-1_egfis1.book 64 ページ 2005年1月20日 木曜日 午前9時45分
Various settings
Procedure E
13 Firmware Ver1.00
fig.system-e.eps
Setup mode
Select an item
from the setup
menu
MENU
EXIT
ENTER
1
Exit setup mode
2
1. With the R-1 stopped, press the MENU button.
You will enter Setup mode.
2. Turn the VALUE dial to select the desired item from the setup menu.
Select 13: Firmware Ver1.00.
* The program version of your R-1 will appear in the “1.00” area.
3. Press the EXIT button or MENU button to leave Setup mode.
If you want to choose another menu item, turn the VALUE dial to select it instead
of pressing the EXIT button or MENU button. To make settings for the menu item
you select, use the appropriate procedure as listed in “System settings (Setup
mode)” (p. 54).
64
R-1_egfis1.book 65 ページ 2005年1月20日 木曜日 午前9時45分
Various settings
Restoring the factory settings
While holding down the ENTER button, switch on the R-1’s power.
Français
Deutsch
The display will show the same content as when starting up normally, but the
settings will have been reset to their factory-set condition.
Italiano
2
Turn off the power of the R-1.
Español
1
English
Here’s how you can restore all effect values and setup mode items of the R-1 to their
factory-set state.
65
R-1_egfis1.book 66 ページ 2005年1月20日 木曜日 午前9時45分
List of messages
This section lists the most important messages that appear in the display.
Display
Explanation
The batteries have run low. Please replace them with
fresh batteries.
The HOLD switch is turned on.
The R-1 is connected via USB to your computer.
No memory card (CompactFlash) is inserted.
There are no MP3 or WAV files on the memory card.
The time shown is the elapsed time.
STOP: stopped
PLAY: playing
Recording-standby mode
The screen shows the name of the file created by this recording.
Press the REC button or PLAY button to start recording.
Status while recording
The screen shows the name of the file created by this recording, and the remaining time that can be recorded.
The recordable time will depend on the capacity of the
memory card.
* remain: remaining time for recording
Name and type of file being recorded
This screen will appear if you press the DISPLAY button
during recording.
Name and type of file that has been recorded
This screen will appear if you press the DISPLAY button
while playing or stopped.
Playback status
The time shown is the remaining playback time for this
song.
* remain: remaining playback time
Playing repeatedly between points A-B
The screen shows the name of the currently playing file
and the elapsed time.
Playing at half-speed
The screen shows the name of the currently playing file
and the elapsed time.
The R-1 is executing a command. Do not remove the
card.
66
R-1_egfis1.book 67 ページ 2005年1月20日 木曜日 午前9時45分
Troubleshooting
English
If you experience difficulties, read this section first. It contains tips on how to resolve
various problems.
Problems with recording
Sound recorded from the mic is heard only from the L (left)
channel
Deutsch
Some mics are stereo, while others are monaural. If you are using a monaural mic, the
sound will be recorded on the L (left) channel.
In this case, you can use “System settings (Setup mode)” (p. 54) 10 Input Select to
select MONO as the mic type. This setting is remembered even when the power is
turned off.
Refer to: “System settings (Setup mode)” (p. 54)
Can’t start recording from recording-standby mode
Français
Check the remaining space on your CompactFlash memory card. Recording is not
possible if there is little time remaining on the card. In this case, the R-1 will enter
recording-standby mode, but you will return to the play mode screen if you attempt to
start recording by pressing the record button or play button.
In recording-standby mode, the screen shows the amount of remaining recordable time.
An indication of 0:00:00 means that there is no time left. Please check the display.
Refer to: “Recordable times on a CompactFlash card” (p. 29)
Can’t use the internal mic (Can’t use an external mic)
Italiano
The internal mic cannot be used if a mic, cable, or device is connected to the mic input
jack or line input jack. If you want to use the internal mic, don’t connect anything to
the other input jacks.
Refer to: “Mic input jack” (p. 15), “Line input jack” (p. 15),
“Recording with the internal microphone” (p. 29)
Recorded sound is distorted
Español
The sound will distort if the input volume is too high. Adjust the input level
appropriately as described in “Adjusting the input level” (p. 30), (p. 33), (p. 36).
In some cases, the sound will distort if you apply an effect while recording. Adjust the
input level while the effect is applied. You can also try adjusting the effect parameters
so that distortion does not occur.
Refer to: “Adjusting the input level” (p. 30), (p. 33), (p. 36)
“Applying an effect” (p. 52)
67
R-1_egfis1.book 68 ページ 2005年1月20日 木曜日 午前9時45分
Troubleshooting
Can’t record
Check the remaining space on your CompactFlash memory card. Recording is not
possible if there is little time remaining on the card. In recording-standby mode, the
screen shows the amount of remaining recordable time. An indication of 0:00:00 means
that there is no time left. Please check the display.
The R-1 can handle up to 255 files. Once the number of files in the CompactFlash card
reaches 255, you won’t be able to make any more recordings.
In this case, the R-1 will enter recording-standby mode, but you will return to the play
mode screen if you attempt to start recording by pressing the record button or play
button.
Refer to: “Recordable times on a CompactFlash card” (p. 29)
Recording is not possible if the CompactFlash memory card is not inserted correctly. If
the display indicates No Card, the R-1 has not detected a CompactFlash memory card.
Turn off the power, and re-insert the CompactFlash memory card.
Refer to: “Memory card handling” (p. 25)
Recording will not occur correctly if the input level specified by the input volume
control is too low. Please set the input level correctly.
Refer to: “Adjusting the input level” (p. 30), (p. 33), (p. 36)
If you want to record via a connected mic, connect it correctly to the mic input jack.
You should also check the setting of the mic type select switch.
Refer to: “Mic input jack” (p. 15), “Line input jack” (p. 15),
“Recording with the internal microphone” (p. 29)
A CompactFlash memory card will not work correctly unless it has been formatted on
the R-1. If you used your computer to format the CompactFlash card, it may not be
formatted correctly for the R-1. In this case, recording will stop immediately after you
begin recording, an indication of No Song will appear, and recording will not be
possible.
Refer to: “Formatting a CompactFlash card” (p. 27)
I used a monaural mic to record, but a stereo file was created
The R-1 normally records in stereo. Even if you connect a monaural mic and set the
Setup mode item Input Select to MONO, a stereo file will be created with the same
sound recorded on the left and right (L, R) tracks.
Even if I adjust the recording level, the sound is distorted
if I turn on the effect
Since some effects work by boosting a portion of the sound, they may cause the overall
volume of the song to increase. This may cause the sound to clip, producing distortion.
If this occurs, take either of the following actions.
• Lower the LEVEL value in the parameters of the effect
This will lower the overall volume, but the character of the effect will be
preserved.
•
68
Lower the input volume to decrease the volume before the effect is applied
This is an easy adjustment to make, but may affect the character of the effect.
R-1_egfis1.book 69 ページ 2005年1月20日 木曜日 午前9時45分
Troubleshooting
Problems with playback
No sound
English
The output volume may be too low. Try gradually increasing the output volume.
Refer to: “Output volume” (p. 16)
Make sure that your headphones or speakers are connected correctly.
Refer to: “Headphone/line output/digital output jack” (p. 16)
“Getting ready to use the R-1” (p. 18)
Deutsch
The CompactFlash memory card contains a song, but the R-1
won’t play it
Make sure that the file name is appropriate. The R-1 can’t use files with a name
beginning with “.” (period).
The R-1 can only play back files with a filename extension of .mp3 (MP3) or .wav
(WAV).
Refer to: “Types of files that the R-1 can handle” (p. 28)
Can’t play back
Français
Make sure that the file name is appropriate. The R-1 can’t use files with a name
beginning with “.” (period).
The R-1 can only play back files with a filename extension of .mp3 (MP3) or .wav
(WAV).
Also, playback is not possible if the file has been corrupted.
Refer to: “Types of files that the R-1 can handle” (p. 28)
A song I didn’t want is played back
Español
Italiano
Could the PLAY MODE be set to Shuffle? If so, the R-1 will randomly select the song to
be played next. This will cause unexpected songs to be played.
Refer to: “PLAY MODE (Playback mode)” (p. 43)
69
R-1_egfis1.book 70 ページ 2005年1月20日 木曜日 午前9時45分
Troubleshooting
Other problems
Power won’t turn on
Make sure that the AC adaptor is connected correctly.
If you’re using batteries, check the polarity of the batteries, and make sure that each
battery is firmly seated in the holder. It is also possible that the batteries have run down;
try a fresh set of batteries.
Refer to: “Connecting the AC adaptor and turning on the power” (p. 19)
“Installing the batteries and turning on the power” (p. 20)
If the R-1 will not turn on even though there is no problem with the AC adaptor or
batteries, it is possible that the R-1 has malfunctioned.
Please contact “Service Information” listed at the end of this manual.
My computer doesn’t detect the R-1 when I connect it
Your computer will not correctly detect the R-1 if no CompactFlash memory card is
inserted. If the R-1 does not appear on your computer desktop, check that a
CompactFlash memory card is correctly inserted.
Refer to: “Memory card handling” (p. 25)
Pressing the MENU button doesn’t take me to Setup mode
You can’t enter Setup mode during playback or recording. Stop playback or recording,
and then press the MENU button to enter Setup mode.
If the R-1 is playing, recording, or in recording-standby mode, pressing the MENU
button won’t put you in Setup mode.
Refer to: “System settings (Setup mode)” (p. 54)
Backlight turns off
If you’re using the R-1 on batteries, the backlight may turn off when the R-1 has not been
operated for a certain length of time, depending on the LCD Backlight setting.
Refer to: “System settings (Setup mode)” (p. 54)
The R-1 goes to sleep
If you’re using the R-1 on batteries, it may go to sleep if no operation has been
performed for a certain length of time, depending on the Sleep Timer setting. You can
use Setup mode 11 Sleep Timer to change this setting.
Refer to: “System settings (Setup mode)” (p. 54)
The settings I made have disappeared
If all of the effects and Setup mode settings you made have returned to their original
state, it is possible that you inadvertently restored the R-1 to its factory-set state.
Refer to: “Restoring the factory settings” (p. 65)
70
R-1_egfis1.book 71 ページ 2005年1月20日 木曜日 午前9時45分
Troubleshooting
I used a USB cable to connect the R-1 to my computer, but it
was not detected
English
If the R-1 is in Setup mode, it will not be detected by your computer. Unplug the USB
cable that connects the R-1 to your computer, exit Setup mode, and make the connection
again.
Refer to: “Connecting the R-1 to your computer” (p. 44)
The effect parameters I edited have been initialized
Deutsch
The effect parameter settings you edit are preserved as long as you don’t change the
effect type; if you change the effect type, the settings will revert to the initial values. If
you make detailed changes to an effect such as “Editable EQ,” we suggest that you write
down the settings on paper.
Refer to: “Applying an effect” (p. 52)
When selecting a song, the song names are slow to appear
Français
If a file is damaged or invalid, if an MP3 file is in a format that the R-1 does not support,
or if the file is very large, the R-1 may take some time to determine whether it is able to
play the file even if the file has an extension of .MP3 or .WAV.
This may cause the display to be slow when selecting files.
Refer to: “Types of files that the R-1 can handle” (p. 28)
“Normal playback” (p. 38)
Acoustic feedback occurs when monitoring through
headphones
Español
Italiano
If you’re using open-air type headphones to monitor the sound while recording,
moving close to the R-1 may allow sound from the headphones to be picked up by the
microphones, causing acoustic feedback. The R-1’s built-in microphones will pick up
even faint sounds, so be careful not to get too close.
Refer to: “Basic connections” (p. 18)
71
R-1_egfis1.book 72 ページ 2005年1月20日 木曜日 午前9時45分
Bedienung und Anschlüsse des R-1
fig.panel-1
1
2
14
3
4
5
15
6
7
8
16
9
10
11
12
1
13
Internes Mikrofon
Dies ist ein ins R-1 eingebautes Stereomikrofon.
Sie können das interne Mikrofon nicht benutzen, wenn ein Mikrofon oder ein anderes Gerät mit
einer der Buchsen für den Mikrofoneingang 18 oder den Standardeingang 19 verbunden
ist. Schließen Sie nichts an die anderen Eingangsbuchsen an, wenn Sie das interne Mikrofon
einsetzen wollen. Bei Aufnahme mit dem eingebauten Mikrofon stellen Sie den MikrofontypWahlschalter auf DYN.
2
Anzeige
Hier werden verschiedene Informationen über den Betriebszustand des R-1 angezeigt.
3
EFFECT-Taste
Drücken Sie die EFFECT-Taste zum Ein- und Ausschalten eines Effekts.
Bei eingeschaltetem Effekt leuchtet die Taste rot.
Wenn Sie diese Taste vor oder während des Abspielens drücken, wird der Effekt auf den
wiedergegebenen Sound angewandt. Wenn Sie diese Taste vor oder während einer Aufnahme
drücken, wird der Effekt auf den eingespielten Sound angewandt, der mit dem Effekt
bearbeitete Sound wird also aufgenommen.
Das R-1 bietet verschiedene Effekte zur Veränderung des ausgegebenen oder aufgenommenen
Sounds an und gibt ihm so eine bessere Wirkung oder erlaubt komfortableres Hören. Sie
können den Sound auch zu einem völlig anderem Charakter transformieren.
4
EDIT-Taste
Benutzen Sie diese Taste für die Effekteinstellungen.
Detaillierte Hinweise zu Effekten finden Sie unter “Using effects” (S. 46). Effekteinstellungen
können Sie unabhängig von der Stellung der Taste EFFECT vornehmen.
5
MENU-Taste
Diese Taste wechselt in den Konfigurationsmodus, in dem Sie verschiedene Einstellungen des
R-1 vornehmen können. Hier können Sie den Kontrast der LCD-Anzeige einstellen, die
Aufnahmequalität bestimmen und verschiedene andere Grundeinstellungen des R-1
vornehmen. Details finden Sie unter “Verschiedene Einstellungen” (S. 90).
72
R-1_egfis1.book 73 ページ 2005年1月20日 木曜日 午前9時45分
Bedienung und Anschlüsse des R-1
6
DISPLAY-Taste
7
English
Mit dieser Taste wird der Anzeigeinhalt des R-1 gewechselt.
Im PLAY-Modus wechselt die Taste nacheinander zur Anzeige der erfolgten
Abspielzeit, der verbleibenden Abspielzeit der aktuellen Songdatei, deren Dateityp und
der Bitrate.
Drücken Sie die DISPLAY-Taste zum Wechseln des Anzeigeinhalts.
PREV-Taste
8
Deutsch
Mit dieser Taste gehen Sie zum Anfang des Songs oder Sie wählen den vorhergehenden
Song aus.
Ein Druck auf diese Taste während eines Songs geht zum Anfang dieses Songs. Wenn
Sie bereits am Anfang (00:00) des Songs sind, führt Sie diese Taste zum vorhergehenden
Song. Mit kontinuierlichem Druck auf diese Taste können Sie zurückspulen.
Diese Operationen funktionieren während des Abspielens oder bei STOP.
NEXT-Taste
Mit dieser Taste wählen Sie den nächsten Song aus. Mit kontinuierlichem Druck auf
diese Taste können Sie vorspulen.
Diese Operationen funktionieren während der Wiedergabe oder bei STOP.
9
REPEAT-Taste
Français
Mit dieser Taste können Sie den Bereich zwischen zwei im Song angegebenen Punkten
A und B wiederholt abspielen. Drücken Sie die Taste einmal zur Markierung des
Punktes „A“ und ein zweites Mal für Punkt „B“.
Zum Stornieren der Abspielwiederholung drücken Sie nochmals die REPEAT-Taste.
Mit der Stornierung der Abspielwiederholung löschen Sie beide Punkte A und B.
fig.repeat-a
1. Drücken Sie während des Abspielens einmal auf
Song
A
Italiano
die REPEAT-Taste.
Dieser Punkt wird der Startpunkt A der
Abspielwiederholung.
fig.repeat-b
2. Drücken Sie nochmals auf die REPEAT-Taste.
A
B
A
B
Song
Español
Dieser Punkt wird der Endpunkt B der
Abspielwiederholung.
fig.repeat-ab
Der Bereich zwischen den in Schritt 1 und 2 von
Ihnen angegebenen Punkten wird wiederholt
abgespielt. Zum Abbruch der Abspielwiederholung
drücken Sie erneut auf die REPEAT-Taste.
10
Song
SPEED-Taste
Diese Taste halbiert die Abspielgeschwindigkeit. Drücken Sie die Taste nochmals zur
Rückkehr zur normalen Abspielgeschwindigkeit. Dies ist hilfreich, wenn Sie mit Musik
in ungewöhnlich schnellem Tempo arbeiten oder sehr schnelle Sprache abhören.
73
R-1_egfis1.book 74 ページ 2005年1月20日 木曜日 午前9時45分
Bedienung und Anschlüsse des R-1
fig.panel-2
1
17
2
18
19
14
3
20
4
5
15
6
7
8
21
9
10
11
12
11
16
13
STOP-Taste
Diese Taste stoppt Wiedergabe oder Aufnahme.
12
PLAY/PAUSE-Taste
Die Taste startet die Wiedergabe. Zusätzlich unterbricht sie Aufnahme und Wiedergabe.
Wenn Sie diese Taste während des Abspielens drücken, wird die Wiedergabe des R-1
unterbrochen und in der Anzeige PLAY-PAUSE angezeigt. Drücken Sie die PLAY/PAUSETaste nochmals, um die Wiedergabe fortzusetzen.
Genauso können Sie mit dieser Taste Aufnahmen unterbrechen. In der Anzeige des R-1wird
dann REC-PAUSE stehen, gleichzeitig wird die REC-Taste rot blinken.
Zur Fortsetzung der Aufnahme aus der Aufnahmebereitschaft drücken Sie nochmals die RECTaste oder alternativ die PLAY/PAUSE-Taste. Die REC-Taste leuchtet bei der Aufnahme
rot.
13
REC-Taste
Bei gestopptem Gerät bringt die REC-Taste das R-1 in Aufnahmebereitschaft. In der Anzeige
des R-1wird dann REC STANDBY stehen, gleichzeitig wird die REC-Taste rot blinken.
Zum Beginn der Aufnahme aus der Aufnahmebereitschaft drücken Sie nochmals die RECTaste oder alternativ die PLAY/PAUSE-Taste. Die REC-Taste leuchtet bei der Aufnahme
rot.
14
VALUE-Regler
Benutzen Sie diesen Regler zur Auswahl der Songs, zur Bestimmung von Typen und Werten
von Effekten und zur Bedienung im Konfigurationsmodus.
15
EXIT-Taste
Mit dieser Taste kehren Sie im Konfigurationsmodus und im Effekteinstellungsmodus zum
vorherigen Punkt zurück. Im Konfigurationsmodus werden Ihre Eingaben gelöscht, wenn Sie
die EXIT-Taste vor der ENTER-Taste drücken.
16
ENTER-Taste
Mit dieser Taste wählen Sie im Effekteinstellungs- oder im Konfigurationsmodus Eingaben aus
oder schließen Änderungen ab.
74
R-1_egfis1.book 75 ページ 2005年1月20日 木曜日 午前9時45分
Bedienung und Anschlüsse des R-1
17
Mikrofoneingang
Anschlussbuchse für ein Mikrofon.
Falls ein Kabel mit dem Standardeingang verbunden ist, wird kein
Audiosignal durch den Mikrofoneingang entgegengenommen.
Deutsch
18
English
Schalten Sie den Mikrofonauswahlschalter 19 auf die passende Stellung, je
nachdem ob ein dynamisches Mikrofon oder ein über den Anschluss versorgtes
Kondensatormikrofon mit Ministecker angeschlossen ist.
Stereomikrofone werden unterstützt, nutzen Sie für die Verbindung ein Kabel mit
Stereo-Ministecker. Falls Sie ein Mono-Mikrofon einsetzen, setzen Sie im
Konfigurationsmodus die Einstellung “10 Input Select” auf MONO. Detaillierte
Hinweise zu dieser Einstellung finden Sie unter “Systemeinstellungen
(Konfigurationsmodus)” (S. 90).
Standardeingang
Wenn Sie Audiosignale von Audiogeräten oder Musikinstrumenten ins R-1 eingeben
wollen, benutzen Sie Stereo-Ministecker zu deren Anschluss an diese Buchse.
19
Mikrofonauswahlschalter
Schalten Sie diesen Schalter in die passende Stellung, je nach dem Typ des am
Mikrofoneingang 17 angeschlossenen Mikrofons.
CND
Eingangsregler
Italiano
20
Wählen Sie beim Anschluss eines dynamischen Mikrofons diese Einstellung.
Wenn Sie das eingebaute Mikrofon verwenden, stellen Sie diesen Schalter auf
DYN.
Diese Einstellung ist für den Anschluss eines kleinen Kondensatormikrofons, das
eine Stromversorgung benötigt. Sie müssen ein „steckerbetriebenes“ Mikrofon benutzen. Diese Buchse liefert eine Versorgungsspannung von 2 V.
* Schließen Sie keine anderen Mikrofone oder Geräte außer „steckerbetriebenen“
Mikrofonen an, wenn dieser Schalter auf „CND“ steht. Andere Mikrofontypen
oder Geräte könnten beschädigt werden.
Français
DYN
Hier wird die Eingangslautstärke des Sounds der eingebauten Mikrofone 1 , des
Mikrofoneingangs 17 oder der Standardeingänge 18 geregelt.
Nehmen Sie die Einstellung mit dem in “Einstellung des Eingangsreglers” (S. 80)
beschriebenen Verfahren unter Beobachtung der Eingangsempfindlichkeit vor.
USB-Anschluss
Sie können das im Lieferumfang enthaltene USB-Kabel an Ihren Computer anschließen.
Wenn das R-1 an Ihren Computer angeschlossen ist, können Songdateien übertragen
oder auf ihren Computer kopiert werden. Sie können auch MP3- oder WAV-Dateien
vom Rechner zum R-1 transferieren oder kopieren, so dass sie dort abgespielt werden
können.
Der Anschluss unterstützt „Hi-Speed“-USB 2.0 und erlaubt so einen schnellen
Dateitransfer.
Wenn Sie das R-1 mit Ihrem Computer verbinden wollen, berücksichtigen Sie bitte auch
“Connecting the R-1 to your computer” (S. 44).
Wenn Ihr Rechner das R-1 korrekt erkannt hat, steht in der Anzeige des R-1 Connected
via USB .
Español
21
75
R-1_egfis1.book 76 ページ 2005年1月20日 木曜日 午前9時45分
Bedienung und Anschlüsse des R-1
Bei bestehender Verbindung zwischen einem Computer und dem R-1 sind
alle Funktionalitäten des R-1 außer dem Netzschalter unwirksam; die
Bedienung von Tasten und Reglern bleibt wirkungslos.
fig.panel-3
1
22 23
22
24
25
26
27
28
Netzschalter
Schaltet das Gerät an und aus.
Schalten Sie das Gerät bei laufender Aufnahme oder Wiedergabe nicht aus.
Vergewissern Sie sich vor dem Ausschalten, dass Wiedergabe oder Aufnahme gestoppt
sind.
• Falls Sie das Gerät während einer Aufnahme versehentlich ausschalten, werden die
aufgenommenen Daten nicht in der CompactFlash-Karte gespeichert.
• Die CompactFlash-Karte kann beschädigt werden, wenn das R-1 bei Lese- oder
Schreiboperationen wie Wiedergabe oder Aufnahme ausgeschaltet wird.
• Wird das R-1 während einer Anzeige „Now working...“ (In Arbeit...) im
Effekteinstellungsmodus oder beim Speichern einer Einstellung im
Konfigurationsmodus ausgeschaltet, wird das Gerät unstabil und kann womöglich
nicht mehr starten.
Achten Sie daher genau darauf, das Gerät in diesen Zuständen nicht abzuschalten.
23
Netzanschluss
Schließen Sie hier das Netzteil an.
24
HOLD-Schalter
Wenn Sie den HOLD-Schalter auf ON stellen, werden Tastenbetätigungen auf dem R1 wirkungslos; damit kann das Gerät bequem vor versehentlicher Bedienung geschützt
werden.
Allerdings sind mit der Stellung des HOLD-Schalters auf ON
Mikrofonauswahlschalter 19 , Eingangsregler 20 , Netzschalter 22 und
Lautstärkeregler 25 weiter bedienbar.
25
Lautstärkeregler
Hier wird die Lautstärke der Buchse für Kopfhörer, Standardausgang und
Digitalausgang 26 eingestellt. Allerdings ist die digital ausgegebene Lautstärke
damit nicht regelbar.
26
Buchse für Kopfhörer, Standardausgang und Digitalausgang
Dieser Ausgang gibt Audiosignale vom R-1 zu Kopfhörer oder externen Lautsprechern.
Wenn Sie ein Digitalsignal ausgeben wollen, müssen Sie ein rundes Digitalkabel mit
Ministecker benutzen.
27
Auswurftaste
Drücken Sie hier, um die CompactFlash-Karte aus der Speicherkartenaufnahme
28 zu entfernen.
76
R-1_egfis1.book 77 ページ 2005年1月20日 木曜日 午前9時45分
Bedienung und Anschlüsse des R-1
28
Speicherkartenaufnahme
Setzen Sie hier eine CompactFlash-Karte ein.
Das R-1 kann als Speicherkarten ausschließlich den Typ CompactFlash verwenden.
Deutsch
English
fig.panel-4
29
29
Français
30
Batteriefach
Speicherkartenabdeckung
Diese Abdeckung bietet einen Schutz vor versehentlichem Entfernen der
CompactFlash-Karte. Wenn Sie die Klappe öffnen, sehen Sie die
Speicherkartenaufnahme 28 und die Auswurftaste 27 .
Español
30
Italiano
Wenn Sie das R-1 netzunabhängig betreiben wollen, können Sie hier Batterien einlegen.
Beim Betrieb des R-1mit Netzteil brauchen Sie keine Batterien.
Vor einem Wechsel der Stromversorgung vom Netzteil zur Batterieversorgung und
umgekehrt müssen Sie das R-1 ausschalten.
Bitte lesen Sie vor der Benutzung des R-1 “Installing the batteries and turning on the
power” (S. 20).
77
R-1_egfis1.book 78 ページ 2005年1月20日 木曜日 午前9時45分
Vorbereitungen zum Einsatz des R-1
Formatieren einer CompactFlash-Karte
Sie müssen eine CompactFlash-Karte vor ihrem Einsatz im R-1formatieren.
Sie müssen die CompactFlash-Karte mit dem R-1 selbst formatieren. Wenden Sie dazu das auf
S. 90 bei “Systemeinstellungen (Konfigurationsmodus)“ beschriebene Verfahren an.
Mit anderen Geräten als dem R-1 formatierte CompactFlash-Karten funktionieren im R-1
möglicherweise nicht richtig.
1
Schalten Sie das R-1 aus.
2
Setzen Sie die CompactFlash-Karte in die Kartenaufnahme des R-1 ein.
fig.startup.epsfig.no-song.eps
3
4
Schalten Sie das R-1 ein.
Falls die CompactFlash-Karte keine auf
dem R-1 abspielbaren Songdateien
enthält, wird in der Anzeige „NoSong“
angezeigt. Wenn die Karte Songdateien
enthält, erscheint die Anzeige für den
PLAY-Modus.
Drücken Sie die MENU-Taste.
* Zum Abbruch des Vorgangs drücken
Sie die EXIT-Taste. Sie werden zur
vorherigen Anzeige zurückkehren.
fig.format-disp.eps
5
Stellen Sie den VALUE-Regler
auf die Auswahl 12 Format Card.
6
Drücken Sie die ENTER-Taste.
fig.format.eps
7
Wenn die hier gezeigte Anzeige
erscheint, drücken Sie die ENTERTaste.
fig.sure.eps
8
Die Anzeige fragt nach einer
Bestätigung, ob Sie die Karte
wirklich formatieren wollen.
Drücken Sie die ENTER –Taste,
um die Karte zu formatieren.
* Zum Abbruch der Kartenformatierung drücken Sie die EXIT-Taste. Sie werden zu Schritt 5 zurückkehren.
Entfernen Sie niemals die CompactFlash-Karte während der Formatierung.
Das kann eine Beschädigung der Karte verursachen.
fig.complete.eps
Die Formatierung ist
abgeschlossen, wenn in der
Anzeige Completed! erscheint.
9
78
Drücken Sie die MENU-Taste.
Sie werden zum Hauptanzeige des PLAY-Modus zurückkehren.
R-1_egfis1.book 79 ページ 2005年1月20日 木曜日 午前9時45分
Einfache Aufnahmemethoden
Die folgende Tabelle zeigt die ungefähren Aufnahmezeiten, die Sie mit CompactFlashKarten aufnehmen können.
ungefähre Aufnahmezeit
English
Aufnahmezeiten auf CompactFlash-Karten
Einheit: Minuten
CompactFlash Größe
64 MB
3
5
26
32
43
52
65
86
130
256 MB
15
23
102
128
170
205
256
341
512
512 MB
31
47
208
260
346
416
520
693
1.040
2 GB
125
188
831
1.039
1.386
1.663
2.079
2.772
4.158
Deutsch
Dateityp
WAV, 24 bit/44,1 kHz
WAV, 16 bit/44,1 kHz
MP3, 16 bit/320 kbps
MP3, 16 bit/256 kbps
MP3, 16 bit/192 kbps
MP3, 16 bit/160 kbps
MP3, 16 bit/128 kbps
MP3, 16 bit/ 96 kbps
MP3, 16 bit/ 64 kbps
Français
* Die oben angegebenen Zeiten sind Näherungswerte. Die tatsächlich möglichen
Aufnahmezeiten können von diesen Angaben geringfügig abweichen. Lassen Sie bitte bei
Ihren Aufnahmevorhaben eine Reserve zu.
* Formatieren Sie die CompactFlash-Karte mit dem R-1 selber.
* Benutzen Sie bei langen zusammenhängenden Aufnahmen das mitgelieferte Netzteil.
* Falls es sich um mehrere Dateien handelt, wird die tatsächliche Gesamtaufnahmezeit
geringer als die hier angezeigten Werte sein.
Aufnahmen mit dem Einbaumikrofon
Das interne Mikrofon des R-1 arbeitet stereophon. Die
von der rechten Seite des R-1 empfangenen
Audiosignale werden auf dem rechten Kanal (R)
aufgenommen, die von der linken Seite auf dem linken
Kanal (L).
L
Italiano
fig.mic-LR.eps
R
1
Español
Schließen Sie keine Kabel an die anderen
Eingangsbuchsen an, wenn Sie das interne
Mikrofon einsetzen wollen.
Wenn ein Mikrofon oder Mikrofonkabel am
Mikrofoneingang oder am Standardeingang
angeschlossen ist, werden diesen Eingängen
Priorität eingeräumt, so dass das interne
Mikrofon nicht benutzt wird.
Das Gerät muss ausgeschaltet sein. Stellen Sie auch den Eingangsregler auf die
Minimumposition.
Wenn Sie den Sound während der Aufnahme mit dem Einbaumikrofon hören wollen,
schließen Sie dazu einen Kopfhörer als Monitor an den entsprechenden Anschluss an. Falls
Sie externe Lautsprecher anschließen und als Monitor zu nutzen versuchen, kommt es zu
akustischen Rückkopplungen. Versuchen Sie nicht, Lautsprecher als Monitor einzusetzen.
79
R-1_egfis1.book 80 ページ 2005年1月20日 木曜日 午前9時45分
Einfache Aufnahmemethoden
2
3
4
5
Schalten Sie das R-1 ein, so wie in “Connecting the AC adaptor and turning on
the power” (S. 19) beschrieben.
Bei Aufnahme mit dem eingebauten Mikrofon stellen Sie den MikrofontypWahlschalter auf DYN.
Berücksichtigen Sie “Types of files that the R-1 can handle” (S. 28) und geben
Sie den Dateityp der gewünschten Aufnahme an. Nutzen Sie für die Änderung
oder Überprüfung der gegenwärtigen Einstellung im Konfigurationsmodus 07
Record Mode (S. 90).
Stellen Sie den Eingangsregler wie folgt ein.
Einstellung des Eingangsreglers
fig.rec-1.eps
1. Drücken Sie die REC-Taste.
2. Das R-1 geht in
Aufnahmebereitschaft. Die
Anzeige zeigt die für den
gewählten Dateityp bzw. die für
dessen Aufnahmequalität verbleibende Zeit an.
Verbleibende Aufnahmezeit
* Der während der Aufnahmebereitschaft angezeigte Songname ist der Name der Datei, die
bei Abschluss der neuen Aufnahme erzeugt werden wird.
fig.rec-2.eps
3. Drücken Sie die DISPLAY-Taste.
4. Spielen Sie den Sound, den Sie
tatsächlich aufnehmen wollen,
und positionieren Sie das interne Mikrofon des R-1 so, dass es den Sound empfangen kann.
* Wenn Sie während der Aufnahme einen Effekt auf den Sound anwenden wollen, regeln Sie den
Eingangspegel bei eingeschaltetem Effekt ein.
fig.rec-3.eps
5. Steigern Sie langsam die
Eingangslautstärke während
der Sound spielt.
6. Stellen Sie das Niveau so ein, dass
B
A
das ■ in der Anzeige des
Eingangsniveaus das ganz rechts
außen stehende ■ nicht erreicht. (Stellung A in der obigen Abbildung)
Bei zu niedrigem Aufnahmeniveau können Sie keine sehr leisen Sounds aufnehmen. Bei zu
hohem Aufnahmepegel sind laute Sounds gestört und verursachen Knarzgeräusche in der
Aufnahme.
* Falls das Aufnahmematerial gelegentliche laute Soundspitzen wie z. B. Schlagzeugeinsätze in
Bandvorführungen oder plötzliches Lachen in einem sonst ruhigen Gespräch aufweist,
empfehlen wir den Einsatz des Begrenzers (06 Limiter, S. 90). Falls dieser eingesetzt werden soll,
regeln Sie den Eingangspegel auf das allgemeine Niveau des Aufnahmematerials ein, nicht auf
die gelegentlichen lauten Soundspitzen. Wenn Sie den Begrenzer verwenden, wird der
Eingangspegel automatisch so eingestellt, dass der Toneingangspegel nicht zu hoch wird. Bei
Verwendung des Begrenzsers sollten Sie den Eingangspegel so einstellen, dass das Symbol ■ in
Stellung B in der Abbildung nur gelegentlich erscheint.
80
R-1_egfis1.book 81 ページ 2005年1月20日 木曜日 午前9時45分
Einfache Aufnahmemethoden
fig.rec-time.eps
6
Drücken Sie die REC-Taste.
Vergangene Zeit seit
Aufnahmebeginn
7
Deutsch
Wenn Sie den Eingangsregler während der Aufnahmebereitschaft oder
während der Aufnahme verstellen, wird sich der Eingangspegel ändern.
Achten Sie darauf, den Eingangsregler nicht unabsichtlich zu verstellen.
Auch bei auf ON geschaltetem HOLD-Schalter ist der Eingangsregler
nicht von der sperrenden HOLD-Funktion betroffen.
English
Die Aufnahme beginnt.
* Sie können die Aufnahme auch mit der
PLAY/PAUSE-Taste starten.
Nach Abschluss der Aufnahme drücken Sie die STOP-Taste .
Wenn Sie die Aufnahme unterbrechen wollen, drücken Sie die PLAY/PAUSETaste. Zur Beendigung der Pause und zur Fortsetzung der Aufnahme drücken Sie
die PLAY/PAUSE-Taste erneut.
Français
Die Aufnahmedaten werden in einer Datei auf der CompactFlash-Karte
gespeichert. Die Anzeige zeigt den Dateinamen der Aufnahme an, und diese Datei
wird selektiert.
* Der Dateiname wird automatisch nach folgendem Schema gebildet: R1_0001.MP3. Die
0001 ist die Zahl, die auf die Datei mit der höchsten Zahl auf der CompactFlash-Karte folgt.
* Die Datei wird auf der Rootebene der CompactFlash-Karte erzeugt. Verzeichnisse bzw.
Ordner werden nicht erzeugt.
Um die gerade aufgenommene Datei anzuhören, drücken Sie die PLAY/PAUSETaste. Informationen zu anderen Wiedergabemethoden finden Sie unter
“Wiedergabemethoden” (S. 85).
Wie der Eingangepegelmesser den Signalpegel anzeigt
Anzahl von
erscheinenden ■
Keine
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
dB
∞
-50,0
-40,0
-36,0
-33,0
-30,0
-27,0
-24,0
––
––
––
––
––
––
––
––
-50,0
-40,0
-36,0
-33,0
-30,0
-27,0
-24,0
-21,0
Anzahl von
erscheinenden ■
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
dB
-21,0
-18,0
-15,0
-12,0
-9,0
-6,0
-3,0
0,0
––
––
––
––
––
––
––
––
Español
8
Italiano
* Da das R-1 über keine interne Uhr verfügt, haben alle Dateien ein Erzeugungsdatum vom
1.1.2002.
-18,0
-15,0
-12,0
-9,0
-6,0
-3,0
0,0
(Clip)
81
R-1_egfis1.book 82 ページ 2005年1月20日 木曜日 午前9時45分
Einfache Aufnahmemethoden
Aufnehmen mit externem Mikrofon
Das R-1 kann dynamische Mikrofone und diejenigen anschlussbetriebenen
Kondensatormikrofone mit Ministecker benutzen, die für die Aufnahmebuchse eines
Mini Disk-Recorders oder der Mikrofonbuchse eines Computers vorgesehen sind.
Wenn Sie ein Kondensatormikrofon einsetzen, muss dies für den
Anschlussbetrieb geeignet sein. Wenn Sie ein falsches Mikrofon oder ein
herkömmliches Stereomikrofon mit Ministecker anschließen, kann Ihr Gerät
beschädigt werden.
fig.conmic-LR.eps
L
R
MIRCRO
Stereomikrofon
MIRCRO TYP
EINGANGSPEGEL
1
Das Gerät muss ausgeschaltet sein. Stellen Sie den Eingangsregler auf die
Minimumposition.
Wenn ein Gerät am Standardeingang (Line input) angeschlossen ist, wird
das Eingangssignal vom Mikrofoneingang ignoriert. Wenn Sie über den
Mikrofoneingang aufnehmen wollen, darf am Standardeingang kein Kabel
angeschlossen sein.
2
3
4
82
Schalten Sie das R-1 ein, so wie in “Connecting the AC adaptor and turning on
the power” (S. 19) beschrieben.
Geben Sie den Dateityp ihrer beabsichtigten Aufnahme an, so wie in “Types of
files that the R-1 can handle” (S. 28) beschrieben. Sie können im
Konfigurationsmodus mit 07 Record Mode (S. 90) die gewünschte Einstellung
vornehmen oder die aktuelle Einstellung prüfen.
Schalten Sie den Mikrofonauswahlschalter auf den Typ des für den
Mikrofoneingang vorgesehenen Mikrofons. -> “Mikrofonauswahlschalter” (S. 75)
R-1_egfis1.book 83 ページ 2005年1月20日 木曜日 午前9時45分
Einfache Aufnahmemethoden
Schließen Sie Ihr externes Mikrofon am Mikrofoneingang an.
Wenn Sie den Sound während der Aufnahme hören wollen, schließen Sie dazu einen
Kopfhörer als Monitor an den entsprechenden Anschluss an. Falls Sie externe Lautsprecher
anschließen und als Monitor zu nutzen versuchen, kommt es zu akustischen
Rückkopplungen. Versuchen Sie nicht, Lautsprecher als Monitor einzusetzen.
6
Stellen Sie den Eingangsregler wie folgt ein.
English
5
Eingangsniveau anpassen
fig.rec-1.eps
Das R-1 geht in
Aufnahmebereitschaft. Die
Anzeige zeigt die für den
gewählten Dateityp bzw. die für
dessen Aufnahmequalität verbleibende Zeit an.
Deutsch
1. Drücken Sie die REC-Taste.
Verbleibende Aufnahmezeit
* Der während der Aufnahmebereitschaft angezeigte Songname ist der Name der Datei, die
bei Abschluss der neuen Aufnahme erzeugt werden wird.
Français
fig.rec-2.eps
2. Drücken Sie die DISPLAY-Taste.
3. Spielen Sie den Sound, den Sie
tatsächlich aufnehmen wollen,
und positionieren Sie das externe Mikrofon so, dass es den Sound empfangen kann.
* Wenn Sie während der Aufnahme einen Effekt auf den Sound anwenden wollen, regeln Sie den
Eingangspegel bei eingeschaltetem Effekt ein.
fig.rec-3.eps
B
A
meisten rechts stehende ■ nicht erreicht. (Stellung A in der obigen Abbildung)
Bei zu niedrigem Aufnahmeniveau können Sie keine sehr leisen Sounds aufnehmen.
Bei zu hohem Aufnahmepegel sind laute Sound gestört und verursachen
Knarzgeräusche in der Aufnahme.
* Falls Ihr Aufnahmematerial gelegentliche laute Soundspitzen enthält, wie z. B.
Schlagzeugeinsätze einer Bandvorführung oder plötzliches lautes Lachen in einem sonst ruhigen
Gespräch, empfehlen wir den Einsatz des Begrenzers (06 Limiter, S. 90). Falls dieser eingesetzt
werden soll, regeln Sie den Eingangspegel passend für das allgemeine Soundniveau ein, und
nicht auf die gelegentlichen Soundspitzen. Wenn Sie den Begrenzer verwenden, wird der
Eingangspegel automatisch so eingestellt, dass der Toneingangspegel nicht zu hoch wird. Bei
Verwendung des Begrenzsers sollten Sie den Eingangspegel so einstellen, dass das Symbol ■ in
Stellung B in der Abbildung nur gelegentlich erscheint.
83
Español
Aufnahmelautstärke.
Stellen Sie den Pegel so ein, dass
das ■ in der Anzeige des
Eingangsniveaus das am
Italiano
4. Erhöhen Sie langsam die
R-1_egfis1.book 84 ページ 2005年1月20日 木曜日 午前9時45分
Einfache Aufnahmemethoden
fig.rec-time.eps
7
Drücken Sie die REC-Taste.
Die Aufnahme beginnt.
* Sie können die Aufnahme auch mit der
PLAY/PAUSE-Taste starten.
Vergangene Zeit seit
Aufnahmebeginn
Wenn Sie den Eingangsregler während der Aufnahmebereitschaft oder
während der Aufnahme verstellen, wird sich der Eingangspegel ändern.
Achten Sie darauf, den Eingangsregler nicht unabsichtlich zu verstellen.
Auch bei auf ON geschaltetem HOLD-Schalter ist der Eingangsregler
nicht von der sperrenden HOLD-Funktion betroffen.
8
Nach Abschluss der Aufnahme drücken Sie die STOP-Taste .
Wenn Sie die Aufnahme unterbrechen wollen, drücken Sie die PLAY/PAUSETaste. Zur Beendigung der Pause und zur Fortsetzung der Aufnahme drücken Sie
die PLAY/PAUSE-Taste erneut.
Die Aufnahmedaten werden in einer Datei auf der CompactFlash-Karte
gespeichert. Die Anzeige zeigt den Dateinamen der Aufnahme an, und diese Datei
wird selektiert.
* Der Dateiname wird automatisch nach folgendem Schema gebildet: R1_0001.MP3. Die
0001 ist die nächsthöhere Nummer der höchstnummerierten Datei auf der CompactFlashKarte.
* Die Datei wird auf der Rootebene der CompactFlash-Karte erzeugt. Verzeichnisse bzw.
Ordner werden nicht erzeugt.
9
Um die gerade aufgenommene Datei anzuhören, drücken Sie die PLAY/PAUSETaste. Informationen zu anderen Wiedergabemethoden finden Sie unter
“Wiedergabemethoden” (S. 85).
Wie der Eingangepegelmesser den Signalpegel anzeigt
Anzahl von
erscheinenden ■
Keine
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
84
dB
∞
-50,0
-40,0
-36,0
-33,0
-30,0
-27,0
-24,0
––
––
––
––
––
––
––
––
-50,0
-40,0
-36,0
-33,0
-30,0
-27,0
-24,0
-21,0
Anzahl von
erscheinenden ■
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
dB
-21,0
-18,0
-15,0
-12,0
-9,0
-6,0
-3,0
0,0
––
––
––
––
––
––
––
––
-18,0
-15,0
-12,0
-9,0
-6,0
-3,0
0,0
(Clip)
R-1_egfis1.book 85 ページ 2005年1月20日 木曜日 午前9時45分
Wiedergabemethoden
English
Normale Wiedergabe
1
Deutsch
Das R-1 hat keine internen Lautsprecher. Darum müssen Sie für das Hören der
Wiedergabe Kopfhörer oder Lautsprecher bereithalten.
Sie können den Kopfhöreranschluss des R-1 als optischen Digitalausgang (optical out)
zur Verbindung mit einem digitalen Audiogerät oder als Standardausgang (line
output) zur Verbindung mit Ihrem analogen Audiogerät nutzen.
Bevor Sie fortfahren, stellen Sie die Verbindungen mit den für Ihr Gerät passenden
Kabeln her. Berücksichtigen Sie “Connecting headphones” (S. 22), “Connecting
digital speakers (digital devices)” (S. 23) oder “Connecting analog speakers
(analog devices)” (S. 24).
Wenn die Anzeige ein Bild wie in der Illustration zeigt, wählen Sie mit dem
VALUE-Regler eine Songdatei.
Drücken Sie die PREV-Taste, um zur vorherigen Songdatei zu gelangen, oder die
NEXT-Taste, um zur nächsten Songdatei zu kommen.
) des R-1; die angezeigte Songdatei wird
Stellen Sie den Lautstärkeregler langsam nach rechts bis auf ein angenehmes
Hörniveau..
* Der angezeigte Songname ist der Name der Datei. Er korrespondiert nicht mit dem Tag (der
Markierung) ID3 in der MP3-Datei.
Italiano
3
Drücken Sie die PLAY-Taste (
abgespielt.
* Songnamen werden in alphabetischer Reihenfolge nach folgender Buchstabenordnung und
nicht in der Reihenfolge ihrer Aufzeichnung angezeigt.
(Leerraum) ! # $ % & ‘ ( ) + , - . 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ; = @
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz
* Falls die CompactFlash-Karte Ordner bzw. Unterverzeichnisse enthält, werden die Dateien
auf Rootebene zuerst angezeigt, gefolgt von den Dateien aus den Ordnern
(Unterverzeichnissen).
Español
2
Français
* Falls die CompactFlash-Karte keine auf dem R-1 abspielbaren Song-Dateien enthält, wird in
der Anzeige „NoSong“ angezeigt.
* Dateinamen, die mit einem „.“ beginnen, werden ignoriert und nicht angezeigt.
* Dateinamen mit anderen Endungen als .mp3 und .wav werden ignoriert und nicht
angezeigt.
Mehr Informationen über Dateien, die das R-1 aufnehmen und abspielen
kann, finden Sie unter “Types of files that the R-1 can handle” (S. 28).
85
R-1_egfis1.book 86 ページ 2005年1月20日 木曜日 午前9時45分
Wiedergabemethoden
REPEAT A-B (Wiedergabewiederholung)
Mit dieser Funktion können Sie einen Songabschnitt bei der Wiedergabe markieren und ihn
wiederholt abspielen.
Verfahren
1
Drücken Sie während des Abspielens
einmal auf die REPEAT-Taste(
).
Dieser Ort wird dem Beginn der
Wiederholung zugewiesen (Punkt
A).
2
Song
A
Drücken Sie nochmals auf die
REPEAT-Taste. Dieser Ort wird
dem Ende der Wiederholung
zugewiesen (Punkt B).
fig.repeat-a
A
B
A
B
Song
Der von Ihnen in den Schritten 1 und 2
angegebene Abschnitt zwischen den
Punkten A und B wird wiederholt
abgespielt. Zur Rückname der
Abspielwiederholung drücken Sie die
REPEAT-Taste erneut.
Song
Hinweise
* Wenn Sie nach der Angabe des Punktes A die STOP-Taste drücken, also bevor Sie einen
Punkt B angegeben haben, wird der Punkt A gelöscht.
* Wenn Sie nach der Angabe des Punktes A die Wiedergabe bis zum Ende des Songs laufen lassen,
liegt die Wiederholung zwischen Punkt A und dem Ende des Songs.
* Wenn Sie die STOP-Taste während der Wiederholung drücken, stoppt die Wiederholung und
die Einstellung für den Abschnitt (A-B) wird gelöscht.
Zum Löschen dieser Funktion
•
•
•
86
Bei angegebenen Punkten A und B löscht das Drücken der REPEAT-Taste (
) die
Einstellungen für die Punkte A und B .
Wenn Sie nach der Angabe des Punktes A die STOP-Taste drücken, also bevor Sie
einen Punkt B angegeben haben, wird der Punkt A gelöscht.
Wenn Sie sowohl die Wiedergabe stoppen als auch die Wiederholungseinstellungen löschen
wollen, drücken Sie die STOP-Taste. Die Wiedergabe stoppt und die
Wiederholungseinstellungen der Punkte A und B werden gelöscht.
R-1_egfis1.book 87 ページ 2005年1月20日 木曜日 午前9時45分
Wiedergabemethoden
1/2 PLAY
(halbierte Wiedergabegeschwindigkeit)
English
Hier wird erklärt, wie Sie mit halber Geschwindigkeit abspielen können.
Verfahren
1
Drücken Sie während des
Abspielens oder bei STOP die
SPEED-Taste.
Deutsch
Die untere Zeile der Anzeige zeigt 1/2 und die Wiedergabe erfolgt mit halber
Geschwindigkeit.
Wenn das R-1 gerade abspielt, wird die Wiedergabe verlangsamt.
Wenn das R-1 gerade gestoppt ist, wird die Wiedergabe mit halber
Geschwindigkeit beginnen, wenn Sie die PLAY-Taste drücken.
Français
* Die Funktion verstellt die Tonhöhe der verlangsamten Wiedergabe so, dass sie der bei
normaler Wiedergabe entspricht. Dies kann einen Schwebungseffekt bei der Wiedergabe
erzeugen, der jedoch keine Fehlfunktion bedeutet.
To cancel this function
Wenn die Wiedergabe in halber Geschwindigkeit aktiviert ist, drücken Sie die
SPEED-Taste zu deren Abbruch.
Español
Italiano
Wenn Sie die verlangsamte Wiedergabe nicht abbrechen, wird auch der
nächste Song verlangsamt abgespielt.
87
R-1_egfis1.book 88 ページ 2005年1月20日 木曜日 午前9時45分
Wiedergabemethoden
PLAY MODE (Wiedergabemodus)
Hier können Sie die Reihenfolge und die Methode der Wiedergabe angeben.
1
Drücken Sie die MENU-Taste.
Sie können den PLAY-Modus während des Spielens des R-1 nicht ändern.
Sie müssen erst die STOP-Taste zum Anhalten der Wiedergabe drücken.
2
3
4
Stellen Sie am VALUE-Regler 05 Play Mode ein.
Drücken Sie die ENTER-Taste.
Stellen Sie mit dem VALUE-Regler den gewünschten PLAY-Modus ein.
Sequential
Single
Shuffle
Die Songs werden nacheinander in der Reihenfolge 001, 002, 002...009 abgespielt.
* Benutzen Sie die Tasten PREV und NEXT oder den VALUE-Regler zur
Auswahl einer Songdatei.
Die einzelne selektierte Songdatei wird wiederholt abgespielt.
Die Reihenfolge der Songs ändert sich automatisch.
* Ein unmittelbar vorher abgespielter Song wird nicht gespielt.
* Wenn Sie die Tasten PREV und NEXT oder den VALUE-Regler zur Auswahl
eines Songs benutzen, werden die Songs in der gleichen Reihenfolge angeboten, wie sie auch PLAY-Modus Sequential erscheinen.
fig.sequential.eps
5
6
Drücken Sie nach der Auswahl des
gewünschten PLAY-Modus die
ENTER-Taste.
Drücken Sie die MENU-Taste.
Sie werden zum PLAY-Modus zurückkehren.
88
R-1_egfis1.book 89 ページ 2005年1月20日 木曜日 午前9時45分
Einsatz von Effekten
English
Anwenden eines Effekts
Dieser Abschnitt erklärt die Anwendung eines Effekts während der Wiedergabe oder
bei Aufnahmebereitschaft. Sie können Effekteinstellungen auch vor der Wiedergabe
vornehmen oder verschiedene Einstellungen bei einer Probeaufnahme ausprobieren.
fig.effect.eps
Beim Abspielen in
Aufnahmebereitschaft
Deutsch
Effektmodus an
3
1
2
Änderungsmodus
EDIT
EXIT
ENTER
Français
Wählen Sie einen Effekt
01:Eazy EQ
-> 02:For Speech...
EXIT
ENTER
Wählen Sie einen Parameter
Typ -> Level 1
Italiano
EDIT
EXIT
ENTER
Español
Editieren eines Parameters
Pop -> Dance
-> HipHop...
EXIT
Den Editiermodus für
Effekte verlassen
Wiedergabe
/Aufnahme starten
Die Parametereinstellungen für Effekte werden bis zu Ihrer nächsten
Änderung gespeichert.
89
R-1_egfis1.book 90 ページ 2005年1月20日 木曜日 午前9時45分
Verschiedene Einstellungen
Systemeinstellungen (Konfigurationsmodus)
Details zu diesen Einstellungen finden Sie in “Procedures” (S. 56).
* Sie können aus laufender Aufnahme oder Wiedergabe und aus der Aufnahmebereitschaft
mit der MENU-Taste nicht in den Konfigurationsmodus gelangen.
Menü/Effekt
01
02
03
04
05
Schnitt-Niveau
Schwellwert-Niveau
AD-N iveau
06
LCD Contrast
Stellt den Kontrast der Anzeige ein.
LCD Backlight
Gibt die Zeitspanne vor, nach der die Anzeigenbeleuchtung bei Batteriebetrieb abgeschaltet
wird.
Delete File
Löscht eine Datei.
Rename File
Ändert einen Dateinamen.
Play Mode
Gibt die Reihenfolge vor, nach der Songs abgespielt werden.
Limiter
Schaltet den Begrenzer für den Eingangspegel an
und aus.
* Der Begrenzer reduziert den Eingangspegel bei
zu starkem Niveau auf ein passendes Maß.
Wert
(Voreinstellung
ist fett gedruckt)
Verfahren
1–5–10
A (S. 56)
OFF, ON, 5sec,
10sec, 20sec
A (S. 56)
––
B (S. 58)
––
C (S. 60)
Sequential,
Single, Shuffle
A (S. 56)
OFF, ON
A (S. 56)
A (S. 56)
A (S. 56)
Schnittgeräusche
reduzieren und an
AD-Konverter weiterleiten
Niveau des Eingangsignals
Der Schwellwert ist –9 dBFS.
90
07
Record Mode
Gibt den Dateityp der bei einer Aufnahme erzeugten Datei vor. Dies bestimmt die Audioqualität der aufgenommenen Datei.
MP3 64kbps,
MP3 96kbps,
MP3 128kbps,
MP3 160kbps,
MP3 192kbps,
MP3 256kbps,
MP3 320kbps,
WAV 16bit,
WAV 24bit
08
Track Splitting
Schaltet die Tracktrennungsfunktion an und aus.
* Diese Funktion spaltet die Datei automatisch
auf, wenn während der Aufnahme ein mindestens drei Sekunden langes Ruheintervall auftritt.
OFF, ON
R-1_egfis1.book 91 ページ 2005年1月20日 木曜日 午前9時45分
11
12
13
14
About the R-1
Zeigt Informationen über das R-1 an.
A (S. 56)
STEREO, MONO
A (S. 56)
OFF, 1min, 2min,
3min, 5min,
10min, 15min,
30min, 45min,
60min
A (S. 56)
–
D (S. 62)
–
E (S. 64)
–
A (S. 56)
Deutsch
OFF, ON
Français
10
Verfahren
Italiano
09
Input Monitor
Schalten Sie diese Funktion ein, wenn Sie das
Eingangssignal über Kopfhörer überwachen.
Schalten Sie aus, wenn das Signal nicht überwacht wird.
* Während der Aufnahme kann der Sound unabhängig von dieser Einstellung gehört werden.
Input Select
Setzen Sie diese Einstellung beim Anschluss eines
Stereomikrofons auf STEREO. Setzen Sie diese
Einstellung beim Anschluss eines Mono-Mikrofons auf MONO. Wenn Sie die STEREOEinstellung mit einem MONO-Signal nutzen,
wird nur der linke Kanal aufgenommen. Bei
MONO-Einstellung wird der Sound auf dem
rechten und linken Kanal aufgenommen.
* Die aufgenommene Datei hat auch bei MONOEinstellung ein STEREO-Format.
Sleep Timer
Gibt die Zeitspanne vor, nach der das R-1 bei Batteriebetrieb in den Schlafmodus geht.
* Diese Einstellung bewirkt bei Netzbetrieb
nichts.
Format Card
Formatiert eine CompactFlash-Karte
Firmware Ver1.00
Erlaubt die Versionsprüfung der Firmware des R1.
Wert
(Voreinstellung
ist fett gedruckt)
Español
Menü/Effekt
English
Verschiedene Einstellungen
91
R-1_egfis1.book 92 ページ 2005年1月20日 木曜日 午前9時45分
Commandes et connecteurs
Figure panneau 1
1
2
14
3
4
5
15
6
7
8
16
9
10
11
12
1
13
Microphone interne
Microphone stéréo intégré
Ce microphone interne est désactivé lorsqu’un microphone ou autre appareil est
branché sur les entrées micro 18 ou les entrées ligne 19 . Il convient donc de ne
rien raccorder aux connecteurs d’entrée si l’on veut utiliser le microphone interne. Pour
enregistrer à l'aide du microphone interne, placer le bouton de sélection de type de microphone à DYN.
2
Afficheur
Tient l’utilisateur informé de l’état d’exécution du R-1.
3
Touche EFFECT
Appuyer sur la touche EFFECT pour activer/désactiver un effet.
Cette touche s’allume lorsque l’effet est activé.
Si l’effet est activé avant lecture ou en cours de lecture, il est appliqué à l’enregistrement
lors de la lecture. S’il est activé avant enregistrement ou en cours d’enregistrement, il
est appliqué au son enregistré, c’est-à-dire que l’enregistrement intègre le traitement résultant de l’effet.
Le R-1 est doté de divers effets permettant de modifier le son en lecture ou en enregistrement afin de lui donner plus de présence ou d’en rendre l’écoute plus agréable. Ces
effets permettent par ailleurs de transformer complètement le son.
4
Touche EDIT
Cette touche donne accès au paramétrage des effets.
Pour plus d’information sur les effets, se reporter à“Using effects” (p. 46). Le
paramétrage des effets est possible que la touche EFFECT soit activée ou non.
5
Touche MENU
Cette touche permet de sélectionner le mode de paramétrage de l’appareil (« Setup ») :
contraste de l’afficheur à cristaux liquides (LCD), sélection de la qualité d’enregistrement et divers autres réglages globaux (cf. “Paramétrages divers” (p. 110)).
92
R-1_egfis1.book 93 ページ 2005年1月20日 木曜日 午前9時45分
Commandes et connecteurs
6
Touche DISPLAY
Cette touche commute les différents écrans de l’afficheur du R-1.
En mode PLAY (lecture), cette touche fait défiler les paramètres suivants : temps de lecture écoulé, temps de lecture restant pour le fichier en cours, type de fichier et débit.
Appuyer sur la touche DISPLAY pour faire défiler les différents paramètres.
Touche PREV
English
7
8
Deutsch
Cette touche permet de revenir au début du fichier en cours ou de sélectionner le précédent.
En cours de lecture d’un fichier, elle permet de revenir au début de celui-ci. Si le lecteur
est déjà calé sur le début du fichier (00:00), cette touche sélectionne le fichier précédent.
Il suffit d’appuyer longuement sur cette touche pour revenir au premier des fichiers en
mémoire.
Ces opérations sont possibles en cours de lecture ou non.
Touche NEXT
Cette touche permet de sélectionner le fichier suivant. Il suffit d’appuyer longuement
sur cette touche pour faire défiler les fichiers vers l’avant.
Ces opérations sont possibles en cours de lecture ou non.
9
Touche REPEAT
Français
Permet la lecture en boucle d’une partie d’un fichier située entre deux points (A - B)
définis par l’utilisateur. Appuyer une fois sur cette touche pour définir le point “A”, et
une nouvelle fois pour définir le point “B”.
Une troisième pression sur cette touche annule la lecture en boucle et efface les points
A et B.
Figure Repeat-a
1. En cours de lecture, appuyer sur la touche
Song
A
REPEAT
de manière à définir le point de départ (point A) de
la boucle.
2. Appuyer une nouvelle fois sur la touche REPEAT
pour définir le point d’arrivée (point B).
A
B
A
B
Italiano
Figure Repeat-b
Song
L’appareil lit en boucle la partie du fichier située entre les deux points ainsi définis aux étapes 1 et 2.
Pour annuler la lecture en boucle, appuyer une nouvelle fois sur la touche REPEAT.
10
Español
Figure Repeat-ab
Song
Touche SPEED
Cette touche met la lecture en mode demi-vitesse. Appuyer une nouvelle fois pour repasser en vitesse normale. Cette fonction permet de jouer sur un morceau de musique
au tempo trop rapide ou d’écouter dans un plus grand confort un enregistrement d’une
personne parlant très vite.
93
R-1_egfis1.book 94 ページ 2005年1月20日 木曜日 午前9時45分
Commandes et connecteurs
Figure panneau 2
1
17
2
18
19
14
3
20
4
5
15
6
7
8
21
9
10
11
12
11
16
13
Touche STOP
Interrompt lecture ou enregistrement.
12
Touche PLAY/PAUSE
Cette touche permet de lancer la lecture, mais également de mettre en mode « pause »
enregistrement ou lecture.
En cours de lecture, cette touche met l’appareil en pause, l’afficheur indiquant PLAYPAUSE. Il suffit d’appuyer une nouvelle fois sur la touche pour relancer la lecture.
De même, en cours d’enregistrement, cette touche permet d’interrompre brièvement ce
dernier. L’afficheur indique alors REC-PAUSE, et la touche REC (enregistrement)
émet une lumière rouge clignotante.
Pour relancer l’enregistrement, appuyer de nouveau sur la touche REC (ou appuyer
sur la touche PLAY/PAUSE). La touche REC émet une lumière rouge clignotante
durant l’enregistrement.
13
Touche REC
L’appareil étant à l’arrêt, la touche REC le met en mode pause enregistrement (« recording-standby »). L’afficheur indique alors REC STANDBY, et la touche REC (enregistrement) émet une lumière rouge clignotante.
Pour lancer l’enregistrement à partir du mode pause enregistrement, appuyer de nouveau sur la touche REC (ou appuyer sur la touche PLAY/PAUSE). En cours d’enregistrement, la touche REC émet une lumière rouge.
14
Molette VALUE
Cette molette sert à la sélection des fichiers, au choix des effets et à leur réglage, ainsi
qu’à la sélection des options du mode de paramétrage de l’appareil.
15
Touche EXIT
Cette touche permet de revenir au paramètre précédent en mode Effect Edit (réglage effets) ou Setup (paramétrage). En mode Setup, toute modification des paramètres est annulée si l’on appuie sur la touche EXIT avant d’avoir appuyé sur la touche ENTER.
16
Touche ENTER
Permet de sélectionner un paramètre ou de finaliser une modification effectuée en mode
Effect Edit ou Setup.
94
R-1_egfis1.book 95 ページ 2005年1月20日 木曜日 午前9時45分
Commandes et connecteurs
17
Connecteur d’entrée microphone
Réservé au branchement d’un microphone
Si un câble est branché sur la prise d’entrée ligne, aucun signal audio ne passe
par cette prise microphone.
18
English
Mettre le sélecteur de type de micro (“mic type”) 19 sur la position correspondant
au type de microphone branché (microphone électro-dynamique ou mini-micro électrostatique à alimentation fantôme).
Le connecteur prend en charge les micros stéréo ; utiliser un adaptateur stéréo de type
mini-jack. Si le microphone est de type monophonique, mettre le paramètre 10 Input
Select (mode Setup) sur MONO. Pour plus d’information sur ce réglage, se reporter
à“Paramétrage système (mode Setup)” (p. 110).
Entrée ligne
19
Deutsch
Le branchement des sorties audio d’un appareil audio ou d’un instrument de musique
sur le R-1 doit se faire sur cette prise par l’intermédiaire d’un câble stéréo de type minijack.
Sélecteur de type de microphone (“mic type”)
Mettre ce sélecteur sur la position correspondant au type de microphone branché sur
l’entrée mic input 17 .
CND
20
Utiliser ce paramètre si le microphone est de type électro-dynamique.
Si le microphone interne est utilisé, régler à DYN.
Utiliser ce paramètre si le micro est de type électrostatique à alimentation fantôme.
Le microphone doit impérativement nécessiter une alimentation fantôme : En effet, cette prise fournit une tension d’alimentation de 2 V.
* Si le sélecteur est sur la position CND, ne brancher aucun microphone ni aucun
autre appareil n’acceptant pas un telle alimentation fantôme, qui risquerait de les
endommager.
Français
DYN
Volume d’entrée
Connecteur USB
Ce connecteur permet de brancher l’appareil sur un ordinateur par le biais du câble USB
fourni.
Une fois le R-1 branché sur l’ordinateur, il est possible de transférer ou copier sur ce
dernier les fichiers sons enregistrés à l’aide de l’appareil. Inversement, il est possible de
transférer ou de copier des fichiers .mp3 ou .wav présents sur l’ordinateur de manière
à les faire lire par le R-1.
Ce connecteur prend en charge la norme USB 2.0 (USB haut débit), assurant un chargement rapide.
La marche à suivre pour brancher le R-1 sur un ordinateur figure à la rubrique “Connecting the R-1 to your computer” (p. 44).
Une fois le R-1 “reconnu” par l’ordinateur, l’afficheur du R-1 indique Connected via
USB.
Español
21
Italiano
Règle le volume d’entrée du microphone intégré 1 , de l’entrée micro 17 ou de l’entrée ligne 18 .
Régler ce niveau selon la méthode décrite à la rubrique “Réglage du niveau d’entrée”
(p. 100) tout en surveillant le niveau d’entrée.
Pour la durée de la connexion avec l’ordinateur, toutes les fonction du R-1 (interrupteur de marche/arrêt excepté) sont désactivées (ses divers commutateurs et touches ne fonctionnent pas).
95
R-1_egfis1.book 96 ページ 2005年1月20日 木曜日 午前9時45分
Commandes et connecteurs
Figure panneau 3
1
22 23
22
24
25
26
27
28
Interrupteur principal
Met l’appareil sous tension et hors tension.
Ne pas mettre l’appareil hors tension en cours de lecture ou d’enregistrement. Il faut impérativement s’assurer que lecture et enregistrement sont coupés avant toute mise hors
tension.
• En cas de mise hors tension accidentelle en cours d’enregistrement, les données enregistrées ne sont pas mémorisées sur la carte CompactFlash.
• Celle-ci peut se trouver endommagée en cas de mise hors tension de l’appareil alors
qu’elle subit une opération de lecture ou d’écriture de données, c’est-à-dire pendant la
lecture ou l’enregistrement audio.
• En cas de mise hors tension du R-1 alors que l’indication Now working... est affichée
(modification du paramétrage d’un effet ou sauvegarde d’un paramètre modifié), le
R-1 cesse de fonctionner correctement et peut même ne plus redémarrer.
Il convient donc de faire en sorte de ne JAMAIS le mettre hors tension dans de telles
conditions.
23
Prise adaptateur secteur
Connecter l’adaptateur secteur sur cette prise.
24
Commutateur HOLD
Le commutateur HOLD étant sur la position ON, les autres touches de l’appareil sont
désactivées, ce qui évite toute fausse manœuvre.
Exceptions : lorsque le commutateur HOLD est sur la position ON, lesélecteur Mic
type 19 , le bouton Input volume 20 , l’ interrupteur marche/arrêt 22 et le bouton Output volume 25 restent opérationnels.
25
Niveau de sortie (Output volume)
Ce bouton permet de régler le volume sonore du signal en sortie de la prisecasque/
sortie ligne/sortie numérique 26 (le niveau de la sortie numérique n’est toutefois
pas réglable).
26
Prise casque/sortie ligne/sortie numérique (Headphone/line
output/digital output)
Prise pour casque ou enceintes externes Pour exploiter le signal numérique, brancher un
câble optique avec prise mini.
27
Touche EJECT
Assure l’éjection de la carte CompactFlash introduite dans l’emplacement pour
carte mémoire 28 .
28
Emplacement pour carte mémoire
Introduire une carte mémoire CompactFlash dans la fente.
Le R-1 prend uniquement en charge les cartes mémoire de type CompactFlash.
96
R-1_egfis1.book 97 ページ 2005年1月20日 木曜日 午前9時45分
Commandes et connecteurs
English
Figure panneau 4
Deutsch
29
30
29
Logement des piles
Couvercle de l’emplacement pour carte mémoire
Italiano
Ce couvercle évite toute éjection intempestive de la carte CompactFlash. Ce couvercle
dissimule l’emplacement de la carte 28 ainsi que la touche d’éjection 27 .
Español
30
Français
Installer les piles dans leur logement si le R-1 doit fonctionner sur piles. Si l’on entend
alimenter l’appareil à l’aide de son adaptateur secteur, il est inutile d’installer les piles.
Mettre impérativement le R-1 hors tension avant de passer d’un type d’alimentation
électrique à l’autre (adapteur secteur / piles et vice-versa).
Lire la rubrique“Installing the batteries and turning on the power” (p. 20) avant
toute utilisation du R-1.
97
R-1_egfis1.book 98 ページ 2005年1月20日 木曜日 午前9時45分
Préparatifs avant utilisation du R-1
Formatage d’une carte CompactFlash
Avant utilisation dans le R-1, la carte CompactFlash doit être formatée.
Cette opération doit être effectuée à l’aide du R-1, selon la marche à suivre indiquée à la page 60
(Paramètres système - mode Setup).
Les cartes CompactFlash formatées sur un autre appareil que le R-1 risquent de ne pas fonctionner correctement avec ce dernier.
1
2
Mettre le R-1 hors tension.
Introduire la carte CompactFlash dans l’emplacement prévu à cet effet.
Figure startup.epsFigure no-song.eps
3
4
Mettre le R-1 sous tension.
Si la carte CompactFlash ne comporte
aucun fichier pouvant être lu par le R1, l’indication No Song s’affiche. Dans
le cas contraire, l’écran de lecture
(“play mode”) s’affiche.
Appuyer sur la touche MENU.
* Si l’on désire annuler l’opération, il suffit d’appuyer sur la touche EXIT.
L’écran précédent s’affiche à nouveau.
Figure format-disp.eps
5
6
Tourner la molette VALUE de
manière à sélectionner l’option12
Format Card.
Appuyer sur la touche ENTER.
Figure format.eps
7
Lorsque l’écran ci-contre s’affiche,
appuyer sur la touche ENTER.
Figure sure.eps
8
Un écran de confirmation s’affiche.
Pour lancer le formatage de la
carte, appuyer sur la touche
ENTER.
* Pour annuler l’opération (pas de formatage de la carte), appuyer sur la touche EXIT. L’appareil revient à l’écran illustré au point 5.
Ne jamais éjecter la carte CompactFlash en cours de formatage. Cela pourrait endommager la carte.
Figure complete.eps
Le formatage est terminé lorsque le
message Completed!s’affiche.
9
98
Appuyer sur la touche MENU.
L’écran principal (mode Play) s’affiche à nouveau.
R-1_egfis1.book 99 ページ 2005年1月20日 木曜日 午前9時45分
Méthodes d’enregistrement
Le tableau ci-dessous indique les durées d’enregistrement approximatives permises par
les différentes cartes CompactFlash.
Unité : minute
Capacité de la carte
.mp3, 16 bits/96 kb/s
.mp3, 16 bits/64 kb/s
64 Mo
3
5
26
32
43
52
65
86
130
256 Mo
15
23
102
128
170
205
256
341
512
512 Mo
31
47
208
260
346
416
520
693
1,040
2 Go
125
188
831
1,039
1,386
1,663
2,079
2,772
4,158
Deutsch
Type de fichier
.wav, 24 bits/44,1 kHz
.wav, 16 bits/44,1 kHz
.mp3, 16 bits/320 kb/s
.mp3, 16 bits/256 kb/s
.mp3, 16 bits/192 kb/s
.mp3, 16 bits/160 kb/s
.mp3, 16 bits/128 kb/s
* Les durées d’enregistrement ci-dessus sont approximatives. La durée d’enregistrement effective
peut varier légèrement ; il convient donc d’en tenir compte au moment des préparatifs d’enregistrement.
* Le formatage de la carte CompactFlash doit être fait à l’aide du R-1.
* Pour un enregistrement continu et de longue durée, utiliser l’adaptateur secteur fourni.
* Si l’enregistrement est fait en plusieurs fichiers, la durée d’enregistrement totale sera inférieure
à celle indiquée ci-dessus.
Français
Durée d’enregistrement (approximative)
English
Durées d’enregistrement sur carte CompactFlash
Enregistrement à l’aide du micro intégré
Italiano
Figure mic-LR.eps
Le R-1 est doté d’un microphone stéréo intégré. Les sons
captés sur le côté droit du R-1 sont enregistrés sur le canal de droite (R), et les sons captés sur le côté gauche
sont enregistrés sur le canal de gauche (G).
1
L
R
Español
Ne rien raccorder aux connecteurs d’entrée (micro et ligne) si l’on veut utiliser le microphone
interne.
En cas de branchement d’un microphone ou
d’un câble sur la prise microphone ou sur l’entrée ligne, la prise ainsi utilisée devient prioritaire, le microphone intégré étant alors mis
hors circuit.
S’assurer que le R-1 est hors tension (interrupteur sur OFF). Régler le volume
d’entrée à zéro.
Pour entendre l’enregistrement au fur et à mesure, brancher un casque sur la
prise prévue à cet effet (Phones). Ne pas tenter de contrôler l’enregistrement
par le biais d’enceintes raccordées à l’appareil sous peine de déclencher une
réaction acoustique (“effet Larsen”).
99
R-1_egfis1.book 100 ページ 2005年1月20日 木曜日 午前9時45分
Méthodes d’enregistrement
2
3
4
5
Mettre le R-1 sous tension comme indiqué à la rubrique “Connecting the AC
adaptor and turning on the power” (p. 19).
Pour enregistrer à l'aide du microphone interne, placer le bouton de sélection de
type de microphone à DYN.
Sélectionner le type de fichier à enregistrer (cf. “Types of files that the R-1 can
handle” (p. 28)). Pour effectuer la sélection ou contrôler le type actuellement sélectionné, utiliser l’option 07 Record Mode (p. 110) du mode Setup.
Régler le niveau d’entrée comme indiqué ci-après.
Réglage du niveau d’entrée
Figure rec-1.eps
1. Appuyer sur la touche REC.
L’appareil passe en mode pause
enregistrement (« REC STANDBY »). L’afficheur indique la
durée d’enregistrement possible
pour la qualité sélectionnée.
Durée d’enregistrement restante
* Le nom de fichier affiché en mode pause enregistrement est celui du fichier qui sera créé en
fin d’enregistrement.
Figure rec-2.eps
2. Appuyer sur la touche DISPLAY.
3. Jouer/produire les sons à enregistrer et positionner le R-1 de
manière à ce que son micro intégré
puisse les capter correctement.
* Pour traiter le son à l’aide d’un effet pendant l’enregistrement, régler le niveau d’entrée après
activation de l’effet.
Figure rec-3.eps
4. Lancer le son à enregistrer et
accroître progressivement le volume d’entrée.
Continuer d’accroître le niveau
d’entrée, de manière à ne pas afB
A
ficher le dernier segment de l’indicateur à barres. (Position A dans l'illustration ci-dessus.)
Si le niveau d’enregistrement est trop bas, l’appareil n’enregistrera pas les sons de très
faible volume. Si le volume d’enregistrement est trop élevé, les sons les plus forts
(crêtes) sont distordus, ce qui se traduit par des craquements tout au long des pistes enregistrées.
* Si le son à enregistrer comporte des crêtes importantes (coups de grosse caisse dans le cas d’un orchestre, rire soudain dans le cas d’une conversation), il est recommandé d’utiliser le limiteur (06
Limiter,p. 110). Il est ainsi possible de régler le niveau d’entrée en fonction du niveau général du
son à enregistrer, sans tenir compte du niveau des crètes. Lorsque le limiteur est utilisé, le niveau
d'entrée audio est automatiquement ajusté pour ne pas atteindre un niveau trop élevé. Lorsque le
limiteur est utilisé, il est préférable d'ajuster le niveau d'entrée pour que le symbole ■ n'apparaisse
qu'occasionnellement en position B .
100
R-1_egfis1.book 101 ページ 2005年1月20日 木曜日 午前9時45分
Méthodes d’enregistrement
Figure rec-time.eps
6
Appuyer sur la touche REC.
Temps écoulé depuis le
lancement de l’enregistrement
7
Deutsch
Si l’on actionne le bouton de réglage du volume d’entrée en mode pause enregistrement (“REC STANDBY”) ou en cours d’enregistrement, le niveau d’enregistrement change. Il convient donc de veiller à ne pas toucher à ce bouton
par inadvertance. En outre, il faut savoir que ce bouton reste actif même si le
commutateur HOLD est sur la position ON.
English
L’appareil commence a enregistrer.
* Le lancement de l’enregistrement peut
également se faire à l’aide de la touche
PLAY/PAUSE.
Pour mettre fin à l’enregistrement, appuyer sur la touche STOP.
Pour interrompre temporairement l’enregistrement, appuyer sur la touche PLAY/
PAUSE. Pour relancer l’enregistrement, appuyer une nouvelle fois sur la touche
PLAY/PAUSE.
Français
Les données enregistrées sont mémorisées sous forme de fichier sur la carte mémoire. L’afficheur indique le nom de fichier de l’enregistrement, ce fichier étant sélectionné.
* Ce nom de fichier est créé automatiquement selon le format suivant : R1_0001.MP3. Les
quatre chiffres (0001) correspondent au chiffre faisant suite au numéro de fichier le plus
élevé figurant sur la carte CompactFlash.
* Le fichier est créé au niveau « racine » de la carte CompactFlash. Aucun sous-répertoire ne
peut être créé.
Pour écouter les données qui viennent d’être enregistrées, appuyer sur la touche
PLAY/PAUSE. D’autres modes de lecture existent - se reporter à “Modes de lecture” (p. 105).
Indication du niveau du signal par l'indicateur de niveau
Nombre de ■
Aucun
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
∞
-50,0
-40,0
-36,0
-33,0
-30,0
-27,0
-24,0
dB
––
––
––
––
––
––
––
––
-50,0
-40,0
-36,0
-33,0
-30,0
-27,0
-24,0
-21,0
Nombre de ■
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
-21,0
-18,0
-15,0
-12,0
-9,0
-6,0
-3,0
0,0
dB
––
––
––
––
––
––
––
––
Español
8
Italiano
* L’appareil n’étant pas doté d’une horloge interne, tous les fichiers ont la même date de création, soit le 1er janvier 2002.
-18,0
-15,0
-12,0
-9,0
-6,0
-3,0
0,0
(Clip)
101
R-1_egfis1.book 102 ページ 2005年1月20日 木曜日 午前9時45分
Méthodes d’enregistrement
Enregistrement avec microphone externe
Le R-1 accepte les microphones électro-dynamiques et les mini-micros électrostatiques
à alimentation fantôme conçus pour être raccordés à la prise enregistrement d’un enregistreur mini-disque (MD) ou à la prise microphone d’un ordinateur.
Si l’on utilise un microphone électrostatique, celui-ci doit impérativement être
du type à alimentation fantôme. Le branchement d’un microphone (y compris
microphone stéréo classique avec mini-jack) de type erroné peut endommager
le matériel.
Figure conmic-LR.eps
L
R
MIC
Microphone stéréo
MIC TYPE
(type de microphone)
INPUT LEVEL
(niveau d’entrée)
1
S’assurer que le R-1 est hors tension (interrupteur sur OFF). Régler le volume
d’entrée à zéro.
Si un câble ou appareil est raccordé à l’entrée ligne, le système ne prend pas
en compte l’entrée microphone. Il convient donc de ne rien raccorder à l’entrée ligne si l’on désire enregistrer par le biais de la prise microphone.
2
3
4
102
Mettre le R-1 sous tension comme indiqué à la rubrique “Connecting the AC
adaptor and turning on the power” (p. 19).
Indiquer le type de fichier à enregistrer (cf. “Types of files that the R-1 can handle” (p. 28)). L’option 07 Record Mode (p. 110) du mode Setup permet de définir
le paramètre voulu ou de contrôler le paramètre en vigueur.
Régler le sélecteur Mic type sur le type de microphone raccordé à lentrée
micro. -> “Sélecteur de type de microphone (“mic type”)” (p. 95)
R-1_egfis1.book 103 ページ 2005年1月20日 木曜日 午前9時45分
Méthodes d’enregistrement
5
Brancher le microphone externe sur l’entrée micro (prise Mic input).
6
English
Pour entendre l’enregistrement au fur et à mesure, brancher un casque sur la
prise prévue à cet effet (Phones). Ne pas tenter de contrôler l’enregistrement
par le biais d’enceintes raccordées à l’appareil sous peine de déclencher une
réaction acoustique (« effet Larsen »).
Régler le niveau d’entrée comme indiqué ci-après.
Réglage du niveau d’entrée
Figure rec-1.eps
L’appareil passe en mode pause
enregistrement (“REC STANDBY”). L’afficheur indique la
durée d’enregistrement possible
pour la qualité sélectionnée.
Durée d’enregistrement restante
Deutsch
1. Appuyer sur la touche REC.
2. Appuyer sur la touche DISPLAY.
3. Jouer/produire les sons à enregistrer et positionner le microphone externe de manière à ce qu’il puisse les capter correctement.
* Pour traiter le son à l’aide d’un effet pendant l’enregistrement, régler le niveau d’entrée après
activation de l’effet.
4. Accroître progressivement le
niveau d’entrée.
Continuer d’accroître le niveau
d’entrée, de manière à ne pas afficher le dernier segment de l’in-
B
A
dicateur à barres. (Position A
dans l'illustration ci-dessus.)
Si le niveau d’enregistrement est trop bas, l’appareil n’enregistrera pas les sons de très
faible volume. Si le volume d’enregistrement est trop élevé, les sons les plus forts
(crêtes) sont distordus, ce qui se traduit par des craquements tout au long des pistes enregistrées.
* Si le son à enregistrer comporte des crêtes importantes (coups de grosse caisse dans le cas d’un orchestre, rire soudain dans le cas d’une conversation), il est recommandé d’utiliser le limiteur (06
Limiter, p. 110). Il est ainsi possible de régler le niveau d’entrée en fonction du niveau général du
son à enregistrer, sans tenir compte du niveau des crêtes.
Lorsque le limiteur est utilisé, le niveau d'entrée audio est automatiquement ajusté pour ne pas atteindre un niveau trop élevé. Lorsque le limiteur est utilisé, il est préférable d'ajuster le niveau
d'entrée pour que le symbole ■ n'apparaisse qu'occasionnellement en position B .
103
Italiano
Figure rec-3.eps
Español
Figure rec-2.eps
Français
* Le nom de fichier affiché en mode pause enregistrement est celui du fichier qui sera créé en
fin d’enregistrement.
R-1_egfis1.book 104 ページ 2005年1月20日 木曜日 午前9時45分
Méthodes d’enregistrement
Figure rec-time.eps
7
Appuyer sur la touche REC.
L’appareil commence a enregistrer.
* Le lancement de l’enregistrement peut
également se faire à l’aide de la touche
PLAY/PAUSE.
Temps écoulé depuis le
lancement de l’enregistrement
Si l’on actionne le bouton de réglage du volume d’entrée en mode pause enregistrement (“REC STANDBY”) ou en cours d’enregistrement, le niveau d’enregistrement change. Il convient donc de veiller à ne pas toucher à ce bouton
par inadvertance. En outre, il faut savoir que ce bouton reste actif même si le
commutateur HOLD est sur la position ON.
8
Pour mettre fin à l’enregistrement, appuyer sur la touche STOP.
Pour interrompre temporairement l’enregistrement, appuyer sur la touche PLAY/
PAUSE. Pour relancer l’enregistrement, appuyer une nouvelle fois sur la touche
PLAY/PAUSE.
Les données enregistrées sont mémorisées sous forme de fichier sur la carte mémoire. L’afficheur indique le nom de fichier de l’enregistrement, ce fichier étant sélectionné.
* Ce nom de fichier est créé automatiquement selon le format suivant : R1_0001.MP3. Les
quatre chiffres (0001) correspondent au chiffre faisant suite au numéro de fichier le plus
élevé figurant sur la carte CompactFlash.
* Le fichier est créé au niveau « racine » de la carte CompactFlash. Aucun sous-répertoire ne
peut être créé.
9
Pour écouter les données qui viennent d’être enregistrées, appuyer sur la touche
PLAY/PAUSE. D’autres modes de lecture existent - se reporter à “Modes de lecture” (p. 105).
Indication du niveau du signal par l'indicateur de niveau
Nombre de ■
Aucun
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
104
∞
-50,0
-40,0
-36,0
-33,0
-30,0
-27,0
-24,0
dB
––
––
––
––
––
––
––
––
-50,0
-40,0
-36,0
-33,0
-30,0
-27,0
-24,0
-21,0
Nombre de ■
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
-21,0
-18,0
-15,0
-12,0
-9,0
-6,0
-3,0
0,0
dB
––
––
––
––
––
––
––
––
-18,0
-15,0
-12,0
-9,0
-6,0
-3,0
0,0
(Clip)
R-1_egfis1.book 105 ページ 2005年1月20日 木曜日 午前9時45分
Modes de lecture
English
Lecture normale
1
Deutsch
Le R-1 n’est pas doté de hauts-parleurs intégrés. Il convient donc d’y raccorder un
casque ou des enceintes.
La prise casque de l’appareil tient lieu tant de sortie numérique (Optical) pour brancher
un appareil numérique que de sortie ligne pour connecter un appareil analogique.
Avant toute chose, effectuer les branchements à l’aide du type de câble voulu. Se rapporter à “Connecting headphones” (p. 22), “Connecting digital speakers (digital
devices)” (p. 23), ou encore à “Connecting analog speakers (analog devices)” (p.
24).
L’écran de l’afficheur correspondant à celui de l’illustration ci-dessus, tourner la
molette VALUE pour sélectionner le fichier audio voulu.
Appuyer sur la touche PREV pour passer au fichier précédent ou sur la touche
NEXT pour passer au suivant.
) ; l’appareil entame la lecture du fichier dont le
Tourner progressivement le bouton de volume vers la droite de manière à régler
ce dernier à un niveau confortable pour l’oreille.
* Le nom de fichier affiché par l’appareil est celui du fichier en cours de lecture. Il ne correspond pas aux données ID3 du fichier .mp3.
Italiano
3
Appuyer sur la touch PLAY (
nom est affiché.
* Les noms de fichiers sont affichés par ordre alphabétique, sur la base de la liste de caractères
ci-dessous, et non pas dans l’ordre dans lequel ils ont été enregistrés.
(espace) ! # $ % & ‘ ( ) + , - . 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ; = @
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz
* Si la carte mémoire recèle des sous-répertoires, l’appareil affiche d’abord tous les fichiers
situés au niveau « racine », puis les fichiers présents dans les sous-répertoires.
Español
2
Français
* Si la mention “No Song” s’affiche, cela veut dire que la carte CompactFlash ne recèle aucun
fichier pouvant être lu par le R-1.
* L’appareil ne tient pas compte de tout nom de fichier commençant par un point (« . »), et ne
l’affiche donc pas.
* Il en va de même de tout fichier dont l’extension est autre que « .mp3 » ou « .wav ».
Pour en savoir davantage sur les types de fichiers que le R-1 peut enregistrer
et lire, se reporter à“Types of files that the R-1 can handle” (p. 28).
105
R-1_egfis1.book 106 ページ 2005年1月20日 木曜日 午前9時45分
Modes de lecture
REPEAT A-B (lecture en boucle)
Cette fonction permet de définir une zone d’un fichier devant être lue en boucle.
Marche à suivre
1
En cours de lecture, appuyer sur la
touche REPEAT(
)
pour définir le point de départ de la
boucle (point A).
Song
2
A
Appuyer une nouvelle fois sur la
touche REPEAT pour définir le
point d’arrivée (point B).
Figure Repeat-a
A
B
A
B
Song
L’appareil lit en boucle la zone ainsi
définie (située entre les points A et B
que l’on vient de créer).
Une troisième pression sur la touche REPEATannule la lecture en
boucle.
Song
Remarques
* Si, après avoir défini le point A, on appuie sur la touche STOP avant d’avoir défini le point
B, le point A est supprimé.
* Si, après avoir défini le point A, on laisse la lecture se dérouler jusqu’au bout du fichier, l’appareil lit en boucle la zone située entre le point A et la fin du fichier.
* Si l’on appuie sur la touche STOP en cours de lecture en boucle, la lecture s’interrompt et
la boucle (A-B) est supprimée.
Annulation de la lecture en boucle
•
•
•
106
Les points A et B étant définis, appuyer sur la touche REPEAT (
) pour
annuler la boucle (point A et point B).
Si, après avoir défini le point A, on appuie sur la touche STOP avant d’avoir
défini le point B, le point A est supprimé.
Pour couper la lecture et annuler simultanément la boucle, appuyer sur la touche STOP.
La lecture s’interrompt et la boucle (points A et B) sont supprimés.
R-1_egfis1.book 107 ページ 2005年1月20日 木曜日 午前9時45分
Modes de lecture
1/2 PLAY (lecture en mode demi-vitesse)
L’appareil permet également une lecture à demi-vitesse.
1
English
Marche à suivre
À l’arrêt ou en cours de lecture,
appuyer sur la touche SPEED.
Deutsch
La ligne inférieure de l’afficheur indique 1/2 PLAY.
Si le R-1 est en train de lire un fichier, la vitesse de lecture est réduite de moitié.
Si le R-1 est à l’arrêt, la lecture à demi-vitesse commence dès que l’on appuie sur la
touche PLAY.
* Cette fonction comprend en outre un ajustement automatique de la hauteur du son visant à
préserver la hauteur normale. On constate alors éventuellement un effet de pleurage qui est
une conséquence normale de ce traitement.
Annulation de la lecture en boucle
Français
Si la fonction de lecture à demi-vitesse est active, appuyer sur la touche SPEED pour
la désactiver.
Español
Italiano
La lecture du fichier suivant se fait également à demi-vitesse tant que l’on
ne désactive pas cette fonction.
107
R-1_egfis1.book 108 ページ 2005年1月20日 木曜日 午前9時45分
Modes de lecture
PLAY MODE (modes de lecture)
Marche à suivre pour sélectionner le mode de lecture voulu
1
Appuyer sur la touche MENU.
Il n’est pas possible de passer d’un mode de lecture à un autre alors que le R-1 est
en cours de lecture.
Il faut donc commencer par appuyer sur la touche STOP.
2
3
4
Sélectionner 05 Play Mode à l’aide de la molette VALUE.
Appuyer sur la touche ENTER.
Sélectionner le mode de lecture voulue à l’aide de la molette VALUE.
Sequential
(lecture
séquentielle)
Single
(fichier unique)
Shuffle (mode
aléatoire)
L’appareil lit les fichiers par ordre numérique (001, 002, 003, etc.).
* Sélectionner le fichier voulu à l’aide des touches PREV et NEXT ou de la
molette VALUE.
L’appareil lit indéfiniment le seul fichier sélectionné.
L’ordre de lecture des fichiers change automatiquement.
* Chaque fichier est lu une fois et une seule.
* Il reste possible de sélectionner un fichier à l’aide des touches PREV /
NEXT ou de la molette VALUE, les noms de fichier défilant dans le même
ordre qu’en mode Sequential.
Figure sequential.eps
5
6
Après sélection du mode de lecture
voulu, appuyer sur la touche
ENTER.
Appuyer sur la touche MENU.
L’appareil revient à l’écran Setup Select - 05:PLAY MODE.
108
R-1_egfis1.book 109 ページ 2005年1月20日 木曜日 午前9時45分
Utilisation des effets
English
Application d’un effet
Ce chapitre explique comment appliquer un effet en cours de lecture ou en mode pause
enregistrement. Il est également possible de paramétrer un effet avant de lancer la lecture, et d’essayer divers réglages d’effets en effectuant un enregistrement test.
Figure effect.eps
En cours de lecture
/En mode pause
enregistrement
Deutsch
Mode effets ON (activé)
3
1
2
Mode Edit (modification)
EDIT
EXIT
ENTER
Français
Choix d’un effet
01:Eazy EQ
-> 02:For Speech...
EXIT
ENTER
Sélectionner un type
de paramètre -> Level1
Italiano
EDIT
EXIT
ENTER
Español
Modification du paramètre
Pop -> Dance
-> HipHop...
EXIT
Sortie du mode Edit
Lancement lecture
/enregistrement
Le paramétrage effectué est conservé tel quel jusqu’à modification ultérieure.
109
R-1_egfis1.book 110 ページ 2005年1月20日 木曜日 午前9時45分
Paramétrages divers
Paramétrage système (mode Setup)
La marche à suivre pour ce type de paramétrage est décrite à la rubrique “Procedures”
(p. 56).
* Lorsque l’appareil est en mode lecture, enregistrement ou pause enregistrement (“REC
STANDBY”), la touche MENU ne donne pas accès au mode Setup.
Menu/effet
01
02
03
04
05
LCD Contrast
Réglage du contraste de l’affichage
LCD Backlight
Définition du délai après lequel le rétro-éclairage
de l’afficheur se coupe en cas d’alimentation sur
piles.
Delete File
Suppression d’un fichier
Rename File
Modification du nom d’un fichier
Play Mode
Mode de lecture - détermine l’ordre de lecture des
fichiers.
Valeur (valeur par
défaut en caractères gras)
Marche à
suivre
1–5–10
A (p. 56)
OFF, ON, 5 secondes, 10 secondes, 20 secondes
A (p. 56)
––
B (p. 58)
––
C (p. 60)
Sequential (ordre
numérique),
Single (lecture en
boucle d’un fichier), Shuffle (lecture
par ordre aléatoire)
A (p. 56)
OFF, ON
A (p. 56)
MP3 64 kb/s,
MP3 96 kb/s,
MP3 128 kb/s,
MP3 160 kb/s,
MP3 192 kb/s,
MP3 256 kb/s,
MP3 320 kb/s,
WAV 16 bits,
WAV 24 bits
A (p. 56)
Limiter
Activation & désactivation du limiteur de niveau
d’entrée
* Le limiteur réduit le niveau d’entrée lorsqu’il atteint un seuil donné (niveau d’entrée excessif).
Seuil de distorsion
Seuil de limitation
Niveau A/N
06
Réduit la distorsion
et transmet le signal
au convertisseur A/N
Niveau d’entrée
Ce seuil est de -9 dBFS.
07
110
Record Mode
Définition du type de fichier créé à l’enregistrement Détermine la qualité audio du fichier enregistré.
R-1_egfis1.book 111 ページ 2005年1月20日 木曜日 午前9時45分
11
12
13
14
A (p. 56)
OFF, ON
A (p. 56)
STEREO, MONO
A (p. 56)
OFF, 1 min, 2 min,
3 min, 5 min, 10
min, 15 min, 30
min, 45 min, 60
min
A (p. 56)
–
D (p. 62)
–
E (p. 64)
–
A (p. 56)
Deutsch
10
OFF, ON
Français
09
Marche à
suivre
Italiano
08
Track Splitting
Activation et & désactivation de la fonction de division de fichier
* Cette fonction divise automatiquement en deux
fichiers tout enregistrement présentant un silence d’au moins trois secondes (lors de l’enregistrement).
Input Monitor
Activer cette fonction lorsque l’on désire contrôler au casque le signal en entrée avant enregistrement. Dans le cas contraire, la désactiver.
* En cours d’enregistrement, l’écoute est possible
que cette fonction soit activée ou non.
Input Select
Sélectionner STEREO si le microphone raccordé
est stéréophonique. Sélectionner MONO si le microphone est monophonique. Si le paramètre
sélectionné est STEREO alors que le signal est
monophonique, l’enregistrement se fait uniquement sur le canal gauche (“L”). Si le paramètre
MONO est sélectionné, l’enregistrement se fait
sur les deux canaux (“L” & “R”)
* Le fichier est stéréophonique même si le
paramètre sélectionné est MONO.
Sleep Timer
Minuterie de veille - définit le délai au bout duquel le R-1 entre en mode veille (alimentation
piles).
* Cette fonction est inopérante si l’appareil est
branché sur son adaptateur secteur.
Format Card
Formatage d’une carte CompactFlash
Firmware Ver1.00
Permet de contrôler la version du système d’exploitation du R-1.
About the R-1
Affichage de divers renseignements sur le R-1.
Valeur (valeur par
défaut en caractères gras)
Español
Menu/effet
English
Paramétrages divers
111
R-1_egfis1.book 112 ページ 2005年1月20日 木曜日 午前9時45分
Controlli e connettori dell’R-1
fig.panel-1
1
2
14
3
4
5
15
6
7
8
16
9
10
11
12
1
13
Microfono interno
È un microfono stereo integrato nell’R-1. Non è possibile utilizzare il microfono interno
se sono collegati un microfono o altri dispositivi ai jack del microfono 18 o ai jack di
ingresso di linea 19 . Se si desidera utilizzare il microfono interno, non effettuare
alcun collegamento agli altri jack di ingresso. Quando si registra attraverso il microfono
interno, impostare il tipo di microfono a DYN.
2
Display
Vengono visualizzate varie informazioni sullo stato di funzionamento dell’R-1.
3
Pulsante EFFECT
Premere il pulsante EFFECT per attivare/disattivare l’effetto.
Questo pulsante si illumina di rosso quando l’effetto è attivo.
Se viene attivato prima o durante la riproduzione, l'effetto è applicato al suono in
riproduzione. Se viene attivato prima o durante la registrazione, l’effetto è applicato al
suono immesso; in altre parole, viene registrato il suono elaborato dall’effetto.
L’R-1 mette a disposizione svariati effetti grazie ai quali è possibile modificare il suono
riprodotto o registrato, rendendo il suono più incisivo o l’ascolto più piacevole. È anche
possibile trasformare il suono fino a dotarlo di un carattere completamente nuovo.
4
Pulsante EDIT
Utilizzare questo pulsante per effettuare l’impostazione degli effetti.
Per maggiori informazioni sugli effetti, fare riferimento alla sezione “Using effects”
(p.46). È possibile effettuare l’impostazione degli effetti a prescindere dallo stato del
pulsante EFFECT.
5
Pulsante MENU
Questo pulsante seleziona il Setup mode, in cui è possibile eseguire varie impostazioni
dell’R-1. È possibile regolare il contrasto LCD, specificare la qualità di registrazione ed
effettuare varie altre impostazioni generiche dell’R-1. Per ulteriori informazioni, fare
riferimento alla sezione “Impostazioni” (p.130).
112
R-1_egfis1.book 113 ページ 2005年1月20日 木曜日 午前9時45分
Controlli e connettori dell’R-1
6
Pulsante DISPLAY
7
English
Cambia il contenuto di ciò che viene visualizzato sul display dell’R-1.
In PLAY mode, questo pulsante consente di passare dal tempo di riproduzione, al
tempo di riproduzione rimanente della canzone (file) attuale, al tipo di canzone (file), al
bit rate.
Premere il pulsante DISPLAY per cambiare il contenuto del display.
Pulsante PREV
8
Deutsch
Utilizzare questo pulsante per passare all’inizio della canzone oppure per selezionare
la canzone precedente.
Se si preme questo pulsante a metà di una canzone, si passa all’inizio di quella canzone.
Se si è già all’inizio (00:00) della canzone e si preme questo pulsante, si passa alla
canzone precedente. È possibile premere questo pulsante e tenerlo premuto per il
riavvolgimento rapido.
Queste operazioni sono disponibili durante la riproduzione o in fase inattiva.
Pulsante NEXT
Utilizzare questo pulsante per selezionare la canzone successiva. È possibile premere
questo pulsante e tenerlo premuto per l’avanzamento veloce.
Queste operazioni sono disponibili durante la riproduzione o in fase inattiva.
Pulsante REPEAT
Français
9
Questo pulsante consente di effettuare la riproduzione ripetuta della parte di una
canzone fra due punti (A – B) prestabiliti. Premere questo pulsante una volta per
determinare il punto “A” e premerlo nuovamente per indicare il punto “B”.
Per annullare la riproduzione ripetuta, premere di nuovo il pulsante REPEAT.
Quando si annulla la riproduzione ripetuta, i punti A e B vengono eliminati.
fig.repeat-a
1. Durante la riproduzione, premere una volta il
Song
A
Italiano
pulsante REPEAT.
Quel punto sarà l’inizio (punto A) della
riproduzione ripetuta.
fig.repeat-b
2. Premere il pulsante REPEAT ancora una volta.
A
B
A
B
Song
Español
Quel punto sarà la fine (punto B) della
riproduzione ripetuta.
fig.repeat-ab
La riproduzione dell’intervallo specificato nei passi
1 e 2 avrà luogo ripetutamente. Per annullare la
riproduzione ripetuta, premere ancora una volta il
pulsante REPEAT.
10
Song
Pulsante SPEED
Questo pulsante dimezza la velocità di riproduzione. Premerlo nuovamente per tornare
alla velocità normale. Questo pulsante è utile quando si suona con una musica ad un
tempo troppo veloce oppure quando si ascolta un discorso pronunciato rapidamente.
113
R-1_egfis1.book 114 ページ 2005年1月20日 木曜日 午前9時45分
Controlli e connettori dell’R-1
fig.panel-2
1
17
2
18
19
14
3
20
4
5
15
6
7
8
21
9
10
11
12
11
16
13
Pulsante STOP
Questo pulsante arresta la riproduzione o la registrazione.
12
Pulsante PLAY/PAUSE
Questo pulsante avvia la riproduzione. Mette anche in pausa la registrazione o la
riproduzione.
Se si preme questo pulsante durante la riproduzione, la riproduzione viene messa in
pausa e il display dell’R-1 indica PLAY-PAUSE. Premere di nuovo il pulsante PLAY/
PAUSE per riprendere la riproduzione.
Allo stesso modo, se si preme questo pulsante durante la registrazione, la registrazione
viene messa in pausa. Il display dell’R-1 indica REC-PAUSE e il pulsante REC
lampeggia con una luce rossa.
Per riprendere la registrazione dalla condizione di Rec Standby, premere di nuovo il
pulsante REC (o premere il pulsante PLAY/PAUSE). Il pulsate REC si illumina di
rosso durante la registrazione.
13
Pulsante REC
In fase inattiva, premere il pulsante REC porta l’R-1 in modo standby di registrazione.
Il display dell’R-1 indica REC STANDBY e il pulsante REC lampeggia con una luce
rossa.
Per avviare la registrazione dal modo standby di registrazione, premere di nuovo il
pulsante REC (o premere il pulsante PLAY/PAUSE). Il pulsate REC si illumina di
rosso durante la registrazione.
14
Potenziometro VALUE
Utilizzare questo potenziometro per selezionare le canzoni, per specificare i tipi e i
valori degli effetti e per selezionare le voci in Setup mode.
15
Pulsante EXIT
Utilizzare questo pulsante per tornare alla voce precedente in Effect edit o Setup mode.
In Setup mode, le modifiche ai valori vengono annullate se si preme il pulsante EXIT
prima di premere il pulsante ENTER.
16
Pulsante ENTER
Utilizzare questo pulsante per selezionare una voce o per completare una modifica in
Effect Edit o in Setup mode.
114
R-1_egfis1.book 115 ページ 2005年1月20日 木曜日 午前9時45分
Controlli e connettori dell’R-1
17
Jack di ingresso del microfono
È possibile collegarvi un microfono.
Se al jack di ingresso di linea è collegato un cavo, il segnale audio non viene
acquisito attraverso il jack di ingresso del microfono.
Jack di ingresso di linea
Deutsch
18
English
Impostare l’interruttore di selezione Mic Type 19 nella posizione appropriata in
base al microfono collegato, che può essere un microfono dinamico oppure un
microfono a condensatore in miniatura plug-in alimentato.
I microfoni stereo sono supportati; utilizzare un cavo stereo tipo mini per eseguire i
collegamenti. Se si utilizza un microfono monofonico, impostare “10 Input Select” in
Setup mode su MONO. Per maggiori informazioni su questa impostazione, fare
riferimento alla sezione “Impostazioni del sistema (Setup mode)” (p.130).
Se si desidera immettere nell’R-1 un segnale audio da un dispositivo audio o da uno
strumento musicale elettronico, utilizzare un cavo stereo mini plug per il collegamento
a questo jack.
19
Interruttore di selezione Mic Type
Impostare questo interruttore nella posizione appropriata in base al tipo di microfono
collegato al jack di ingresso del microfono 17 .
CND
20
Utilizzare questa impostazione se si collega un microfono dinamico.
Se si utilizza il microfono interno, impostarlo a DYN.
Utilizzare questa impostazione se si collega un microfono a condensatore in
miniatura che richiede alimentazione elettrica. È necessario utilizzare un
microfono “plug-in alimentato”. Questo jack fornisce una tensione di 2 V.
* Se questo interruttore è impostato su CND, non collegare alcun microfono o altro
dispositivo diverso da un microfono "plug-in alimentato". Qualsiasi microfono o
dispositivo di altro tipo potrebbe risultare danneggiato.
Français
DYN
Volume di ingresso
Connettore USB
È possibile utilizzare il cavo USB incluso per collegare questo connettore al computer.
Se l’R-1 è collegato al computer, i file delle canzoni registrati possono essere trasferiti o
copiati sul computer. È anche possibile trasferire o copiare file MP3 o WAV dal
computer all’R-1, in modo da poterli riprodurre sull’R-1.
Questo connettore supporta l’USB 2.0 (USB ad alta velocità), che consente il
trasferimento veloce dei file.
Se si desidera collegare l’R-1 al computer, fare riferimento alla sezione “Connecting the
R-1 to your computer” (p.44).
Quando il computer ha riconosciuto correttamente l’R-1, il display dell’R-1 indica
Connected via USB.
Español
21
Italiano
Regola il volume di ingresso del suono proveniente dai microfoni integrati 1 , dai jack
di ingresso del microfono 17 o dal jack di ingresso di linea 18 .
Utilizzare la procedura descritta nella sezione “Regolazione del livello di ingresso”
(p.120) per regolarlo mentre si controlla il livello di ingresso.
Quando l’R-1 è collegato ad un computer, tutte le funzioni dell’R-1 (diverse
dall’interruttore di alimentazione) sono disabilitate; l’azionamento dei
pulsanti e degli interruttori non produce alcun effetto.
115
R-1_egfis1.book 116 ページ 2005年1月20日 木曜日 午前9時45分
Controlli e connettori dell’R-1
fig.panel-3
1
22 23
22
24
25
26
27
28
Interruttore di alimentazione
Accende/spegne l’apparecchio.
Non spegnere l’apparecchio durante la riproduzione o la registrazione. È necessario
assicurarsi che la riproduzione o la registrazione siano terminate prima di spegnere
l’apparecchio.
• Se l’apparecchio viene spento accidentalmente durante la registrazione, i dati in
registrazione non vengono salvati sulla scheda CompactFlash.
• La scheda CompactFlash potrebbe risultare danneggiata se si spegne l’R-1 durante la
lettura o la scrittura di dati, come in fase di riproduzione o registrazione.
• Se si spegne l’R-1 mentre è visualizzata la scritta “Now working…” durante l’editing
di un effetto o durante il salvataggio di un’impostazione modificata, l’R-1 diventa
instabile e potrebbe non riavviarsi.
Si raccomanda vivamente di non spegnere l'apparecchio quando sta eseguendo queste
operazioni.
23
Jack dell’adattatore AC
Collegare l’adattatore AC incluso a questa presa.
24
Interruttore HOLD
Se si imposta l’interruttore HOLD in posizione ON, l'azionamento dei pulsanti dell’R1 non produce alcun effetto; è un modo utile per impedire che l’R-1 venga azionato
accidentalmente.
Tuttavia, anche quando l’interruttore HOLD è su ON, l’interruttore di selezione
Mic Type 19 , il volume di ingresso 20 , l’interruttore di alimentazione 22 e
il volume di uscita 25 sono azionabili.
25
Volume di uscita
Regola il volume del segnale in uscita dal jack delle cuffie/di uscita di linea/di
uscita digitale 26 . Tuttavia, il volume dell’uscita digitale non è regolabile.
26
Jack delle cuffie/di uscita di linea/di uscita digitale
Questo jack trasmette il segnale audio dall’R-1 alle cuffie o ai diffusori esterni. Se si
desidera trasmettere un segnale digitale, utilizzare un cavo digitale ottico tondo tipo
mini.
27
Pulsante Eject
Premere questo pulsante per fare uscire la scheda CompactFlash inserita
nell’alloggiamento per la scheda di memoria 28 .
28
Alloggiamento per la scheda di memoria
Inserire una scheda CompactFlash in questo alloggiamento.
CompactFlash è l’unico tipo di scheda di memoria supportata dall’R-1.
116
R-1_egfis1.book 117 ページ 2005年1月20日 木曜日 午前9時45分
Controlli e connettori dell’R-1
English
fig.panel-4
Deutsch
29
30
29
Vano batterie
Coperchio dell’alloggiamento per la scheda di memoria
Italiano
Questo coperchio impedisce la rimozione accidentale della scheda CompactFlash. Una
volta aperto il coperchio, si possono vedere l’alloggiamento della scheda di
memoria 28 e il pulsante eject 27 .
Español
30
Français
Se si desidera alimentare l’R-1 mediante batterie, inserire le batterie in questo vano. Se
si utilizza l’R-1 con l’apposito adattatore AC, non è necessario inserire le batterie.
È necessario spegnere l’R-1 prima di passare dal funzionamento con l’adattatore AC al
funzionamento con le batterie oppure dal funzionamento con le batterie al
funzionamento con l’adattatore AC.
Consultare la sezione “Installing the batteries and turning on the power” (p.20)
prima di utilizzare l’R-1.
117
R-1_egfis1.book 118 ページ 2005年1月20日 木曜日 午前9時45分
Preparazione all’utilizzo dell’R-1
Formattazione di una scheda CompactFlash
È possibile formattare una scheda CompactFlash prima di utilizzarla con l’R-1.
È necessario utilizzare l’R-1 per formattare la scheda CompactFlash. Seguire la procedura
illustrata a pagina 60 di “Impostazioni del sistema (Setup mode)”
Le schede CompactFlash formattate da un dispositivo diverso dall’R-1 potrebbero non
funzionare correttamente con l’R-1.
1
Spegnere l’R-1.
2
Inserire la scheda CompactFlash nell’alloggiamento per la scheda di memoria dell’R-1.
fig.startup.epsfig.no-song.eps
3
4
Accendere l’R-1.
Se la scheda CompactFlash non
contiene canzoni (file) che l’R-1 è in
grado di riprodurre, il display
visualizza la scritta No Song. Se la
scheda contiene canzoni (file),
compare la schermata della modalità
di riproduzione.
Premere il pulsante MENU.
* Se si desidera annullare la procedura,
premere il pulsante EXIT. Si torna
quindi alla schermata precedente.
fig.format-disp.eps
5
Ruotare il potenziometro VALUE
per selezionare 12 Format Card.
6
Premere il pulsante [ENTER].
fig.format.eps
7
Quando viene visualizzata la
schermata riportata a sinistra,
premere il pulsante ENTER.
fig.sure.eps
8
Viene richiesta la conferma per la
formattazione della scheda. Per
formattare la scheda, premere il
pulsante ENTER.
* Se non si desidera formattare la scheda, premere il pulsante EXIT. Si torna quindi alla fase 5.
Non rimuovere la scheda CompactFlash durante la formattazione. Questa
operazione potrebbe danneggiare la scheda CompactFlash.
fig.complete.eps
La formattazione è completa
quando viene visualizzata la scritta
Completed!
9
118
Premere il pulsante MENU.
Si torna quindi alla schermata principale (modalità di riproduzione).
R-1_egfis1.book 119 ページ 2005年1月20日 木曜日 午前9時45分
Metodi di registrazione di base
La seguente tabella illustra la durata di registrazione approssimativa delle schede
CompactFlash.
Tempi di registrazione (approssimativi)
English
Tempi di registrazione su una scheda CompactFlash
Unità: minuti
Dimensioni CompactFlash
MP3, 16 bit/64 kbps
64 MB
3
5
26
32
43
52
65
86
130
256 MB
15
23
102
128
170
205
256
341
512
512 MB
31
47
208
260
346
416
520
693
1,040
2 GB
125
188
831
1,039
1,386
1,663
2,079
2,772
4,158
Deutsch
Tipo di file
WAV, 24 bit/44.1 kHz
WAV, 16 bit/44.1 kHz
MP3, 16 bit/320 kbps
MP3, 16 bit/256 kbps
MP3, 16 bit/192 kbps
MP3, 16 bit/160 kbps
MP3, 16 bit/128 kbps
MP3, 16 bit/96 kbps
* Utilizzare l’R-1 per formattare la scheda CompactFlash.
* Utilizzare l’adattatore AC incluso per registrare ininterrottamente per un periodo prolungato.
* In presenza di più file, il tempo di registrazione complessivo sarà inferiore a quello riportato qui
sopra.
Français
* I tempi di registrazione elencati qui sopra sono approssimativi. La durata di registrazione
effettiva potrebbe essere leggermente differente rispetto a quella riportata qui. Si consiglia quindi
di includere un margine di sicurezza nei programmi di registrazione.
Registrazione mediante il microfono interno
Il microfono interno dell’R-1 è stereofonico. I suoni che
arrivano al microfono sul lato destro dell'R-1 sono
registrati sul canale destro (R), mentre i suoni captati dal
microfono di sinistra sono registrati sul canale sinistro
(L).
L
Italiano
fig.mic-LR.eps
R
1
Español
Se si desidera utilizzare il microfono interno,
non effettuare alcun collegamento al jack di
ingresso del microfono o al jack di ingresso di
linea.
Se si collega un microfono o un cavo al jack di
ingresso del microfono o al jack di ingresso di
linea, questi ingressi hanno la priorità e il
microfono interno non viene utilizzato.
Assicurarsi che l’R-1 sia spento. Impostare anche il volume di ingresso al
minimo.
Se si desidera ascoltare (monitorare) il suono durante la registrazione dal
microfono interno, collegare delle cuffie al jack delle cuffie per il monitoraggio. Se
si collegano diffusori esterni al fine di utilizzarli per il monitoraggio, si verifica un
ritorno acustico, quindi non eseguire il monitoraggio attraverso i diffusori.
119
R-1_egfis1.book 120 ページ 2005年1月20日 木曜日 午前9時45分
Metodi di registrazione di base
2
3
4
5
Accendere l’R-1 come descritto nella sezione “Connecting the AC adaptor and
turning on the power” (p.19).
Se si registra con il microfono interno, impostare il tipo di microfono a DYN.
Consultare la sezione “Types of files that the R-1 can handle” (p.28) e specificare
il tipo di file da registrare. Per effettuare la selezione o per verificare la selezione
attuale, utilizzare 07 Record Mode (p. 130) in Setup mode.
Regolare il livello di ingresso come segue.
Regolazione del livello di ingresso
fig.rec-1.eps
1. Premere il pulsante REC.
L’R-1 entra in modo standby di
registrazione.
Il display visualizza la durata di
registrazione rimanente dell’R-1
Tempo di registrazione rimanente
per il tipo di file (qualità di
registrazione) selezionato.
* Il nome della canzone visualizzato in Record Standby mode è il nome del file che viene creato
quando termina la registrazione.
fig.rec-2.eps
2. Premere il pulsante DISPLAY.
3. Riprodurre (o eseguire) i suoni
da registrare e posizionare il
microfono interno dell’R-1 dove può captarli.
* Se si desidera applicare un effetto ai suoni durante la registrazione, regolare il livello di
ingresso mentre l’effetto è attivo (ovvero applicato).
fig.rec-3.eps
4. Durante la riproduzione dei
suoni, aumentare gradualmente
il volume di ingresso.
Regolare il livello in modo che gli
indicatori del livello di ingresso
B
A
■ visualizzati sul display non
raggiungano il ■ più a destra. (Posizione A nell’illustrazione sopra)
Se il livello di registrazione è troppo basso, non è possibile registrare i suoni molto
bassi. Se il livello di registrazione è troppo alto, i suoni forti risultano distorti e
provocano crepitio nel suono registrato.
* Se il materiale che si registra contiene a volte suoni forti improvvisi, come l’attacco di una
batteria nell’esecuzione di un gruppo musicale o una risata improvvisa durante una
conversazione tranquilla, si raccomanda di utilizzare il Limiter (06 Limiter, p. 130). Nel fare
questo, regolare il livello di ingresso in modo opportuno per il tipo principale di suono che si
sta registrando, non per i suoni forti improvvisi che si verificano occasionalmente. Quando
si usa il limitatore, il livello di ingresso viene regolato automaticamente così che il livello di
ingresso audio non diventi eccessivamente elevato. Quando si utilizza il limitatore, si
dovrebbe regolare il livello di ingresso in modo che il simbolo ■ alla posizione B
nell’illustrazione appaia soltanto occasionalmente.
120
R-1_egfis1.book 121 ページ 2005年1月20日 木曜日 午前9時45分
Metodi di registrazione di base
fig.rec-time.eps
6
Premere il pulsante REC.
Tempo trascorso dall’inizio
della registrazione
7
Deutsch
Se si sposta il controllo del volume di ingresso in Record Standby mode
oppure durante la registrazione, il livello di ingresso viene modificato. Fare
attenzione a non azionare inavvertitamente il controllo del volume di
ingresso. Anche se l’interruttore HOLD è impostato su ON, la funzione
HOLD non incide sul volume di ingresso.
English
Viene avviata la registrazione.
* È anche possibile avviare la registrazione
premendo il pulsante PLAY/PAUSE.
Al termine della registrazione, premere il pulsante STOP.
Se si desidera mettere in pausa la registrazione, premere il pulsante PLAY/
PAUSE. Se si desidera terminare la pausa e riprendere la registrazione, premere di
nuovo il pulsante PLAY/PAUSE.
Français
I dati registrati vengono salvati in un file sulla scheda CompactFlash. Il display
visualizza il nome del file dei dati registrati; quel file è selezionato.
* Il nome del file viene creato automaticamente nel seguente formato: R1_0001.MP3. La
parte 0001 è il numero che segue il file con il numero più elevato esistente nella scheda
CompactFlash.
* Il file è creato a livello di root della scheda CompactFlash. Non vengono create cartelle
(directory).
Per ascoltare i dati appena registrati, premere il pulsante PLAY/PAUSE. Per gli
altri metodi di riproduzione, fare riferimento alla sezione “Metodi di
riproduzione” (p.125).
Come il controllo del livello di ingresso indica il livello del signale
Numero di ■’s
Nessuno
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
∞
-50,0
-40,0
-36,0
-33,0
-30,0
-27,0
-24,0
dB
––
––
––
––
––
––
––
––
-50,0
-40,0
-36,0
-33,0
-30,0
-27,0
-24,0
-21,0
Numero di ■’s
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
-21,0
-18,0
-15,0
-12,0
-9,0
-6,0
-3,0
0,0
dB
––
––
––
––
––
––
––
––
Español
8
Italiano
* Dal momento che l’R-1 non dispone di un orologio interno, tutti i file hanno la stessa data
di creazione: 1 gennaio 2002.
-18,0
-15,0
-12,0
-9,0
-6,0
-3,0
0,0
(Clip)
121
R-1_egfis1.book 122 ページ 2005年1月20日 木曜日 午前9時45分
Metodi di registrazione di base
Registrazione mediante un microfono esterno
L’R-1 può utilizzare microfoni dinamici e microfoni a condensatore in miniatura plugin alimentati progettati per essere collegati al jack di registrazione di un registratore MD
(Mini Disc) o ai jack del microfono di un computer.
Se si utilizza un microfono a condensatore, è necessario utilizzarne uno plugin alimentato. Se si collega un tipo di microfono sbagliato o un comune
microfono stereo mini plug, l’apparecchio potrebbe risultare danneggiato.
fig.conmic-LR.eps
L
R
MIC
Microfono stereo
MIC TYPE
INPUT LEVEL
1
Assicurarsi che l’R-1 sia spento. Impostare il volume di ingresso al minimo.
Se qualcosa è collegato al jack di ingresso di linea, il segnale in ingresso
dal jack di ingresso del microfono viene ignorato. Se si desidera registrare
attraverso il jack di ingresso del microfono, non effettuare alcun
collegamento al jack di ingresso di linea.
2
3
4
122
Accendere l’R-1 come descritto nella sezione “Connecting the AC adaptor and
turning on the power” (p.19).
Specificare il tipo di file da registrare, come descritto nella sezione “Types of files
that the R-1 can handle” (p.28). È possibile utilizzare 07 Record Mode (p. 130) in
Setup mode per specificare l’impostazione desiderata oppure per verificare
l’impostazione attuale.
Impostare l’interruttore di selezione Mic Type in base al tipo di microfono collegato al
jack di ingresso del microfono. -> “Interruttore di selezione Mic Type” (p.115)
R-1_egfis1.book 123 ページ 2005年1月20日 木曜日 午前9時45分
Metodi di registrazione di base
5
Collegare il microfono esterno al jack di ingresso del microfono.
6
English
Se si desidera ascoltare (monitorare) il suono durante la registrazione,
collegare delle cuffie al jack delle cuffie per il monitoraggio. Se si collegano
diffusori esterni al fine di utilizzarli per il monitoraggio, si verifica un ritorno
acustico, quindi non eseguire il monitoraggio attraverso i diffusori.
Regolare il livello di ingresso come segue.
Regolazione del livello di ingresso
fig.rec-1.eps
L’R-1 entra in modo standby di
registrazione. Il display
visualizza la durata di
registrazione rimanente dell’R-1
per il tipo di file (qualità di
registrazione) selezionato.
Tempo di registrazione rimanente
fig.rec-2.eps
Français
* Il nome della canzone visualizzato in Record Standby mode è il nome del file che viene creato
quando termina la registrazione.
Deutsch
1. Premere il pulsante REC.
2. Premere il pulsante DISPLAY.
3. Riprodurre (o eseguire) i suoni
da registrare e posizionare il
microfono esterno dove può captarli.
4. Aumentare gradualmente il
volume di ingresso.
Regolare il livello in modo che gli
indicatori del livello di ingresso
B
A
■ visualizzati sul display non
raggiungano il ■ più a destra.
(Posizione A nell’illustrazione sopra)
Se il livello di registrazione è troppo basso, non è possibile registrare i suoni molto
bassi. Se il livello di registrazione è troppo alto, i suoni forti risultano distorti e
provocano crepitio nel suono registrato.
* Se il materiale che si registra contiene a volte suoni forti improvvisi, come l’attacco di una
batteria nell’esecuzione di un gruppo musicale o una risata improvvisa durante una
conversazione tranquilla, si raccomanda di utilizzare il Limiter (06 Limiter, p. 130).
Nel fare questo, regolare il livello di ingresso in modo opportuno per il tipo principale di suono
che si sta registrando, non per i suoni forti improvvisi che si verificano occasionalmente.
Quando si usa il limitatore, il livello di ingresso viene regolato automaticamente così che il livello
di ingresso audio non diventi eccessivamente elevato. Quando si utilizza il limitatore, si dovrebbe
regolare il livello di ingresso in modo che il simbolo ■ alla posizione B nell’illustrazione appaia
soltanto occasionalmente.
123
Español
fig.rec-3.eps
Italiano
* Se si desidera applicare un effetto ai suoni durante la registrazione, regolare il livello di ingresso
mentre l’effetto è attivo (ovvero applicato).
R-1_egfis1.book 124 ページ 2005年1月20日 木曜日 午前9時45分
Metodi di registrazione di base
fig.rec-time.eps
7
Premere il pulsante REC.
Viene avviata la registrazione.
* È anche possibile avviare la
registrazione premendo il pulsante
PLAY/PAUSE.
Tempo trascorso dall’inizio
della registrazione
Se si sposta il controllo del volume di ingresso in Record Standby mode
oppure durante la registrazione, il livello di ingresso viene modificato. Fare
attenzione a non azionare inavvertitamente il controllo del volume di
ingresso. Anche se l’interruttore HOLD è impostato su ON, la funzione
HOLD non incide sul volume di ingresso.
8
Al termine della registrazione, premere il pulsante STOP.
Se si desidera mettere in pausa la registrazione, premere il pulsante PLAY/
PAUSE. Se si desidera terminare la pausa e riprendere la registrazione, premere di
nuovo il pulsante PLAY/PAUSE.
I dati registrati vengono salvati in un file sulla scheda CompactFlash. Il display
visualizza il nome del file dei dati registrati; quel file è selezionato.
* Il nome del file viene creato automaticamente nel seguente formato: R1_0001.MP3. La
parte 0001 è il numero che segue il file con il numero più elevato esistente nella scheda
CompactFlash.
* Il file è creato a livello di root della scheda CompactFlash. Non vengono create cartelle
(directory).
9
Per ascoltare i dati appena registrati, premere il pulsante PLAY/PAUSE. Per gli
altri metodi di riproduzione, fare riferimento alla sezione “Metodi di
riproduzione” (p.125).
Come il controllo del livello di ingresso indica il livello del signale
Numero di ■’s
Nessuno
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
124
∞
-50,0
-40,0
-36,0
-33,0
-30,0
-27,0
-24,0
dB
––
––
––
––
––
––
––
––
-50,0
-40,0
-36,0
-33,0
-30,0
-27,0
-24,0
-21,0
Numero di ■’s
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
-21,0
-18,0
-15,0
-12,0
-9,0
-6,0
-3,0
0,0
dB
––
––
––
––
––
––
––
––
-18,0
-15,0
-12,0
-9,0
-6,0
-3,0
0,0
(Clip)
R-1_egfis1.book 125 ページ 2005年1月20日 木曜日 午前9時45分
Metodi di riproduzione
English
Riproduzione normale
1
Deutsch
L'R-1 non dispone di diffusori interni. Per ascoltare la riproduzione, è necessario
munirsi di cuffie o diffusori.
È possibile utilizzare il jack delle cuffie dell’R-1 come uscita digitale (uscita optical) per
il collegamento ad un dispositivo audio digitale o come uscita di linea per il
collegamento ad un dispositivo audio analogico.
Prima di proseguire, eseguire i collegamenti mediante il tipo di cavo adatto al
dispositivo. Fare riferimento a “Connecting headphones” (p.22), “Connecting digital
speakers (digital devices)” (p.23) o “Connecting analog speakers (analog
devices)” (p.24).
Mentre il display visualizza una schermata come quella nell’illustrazione, ruotare
il potenziometro VALUE per selezionare una canzone (file).
Premere il pulsante PREV per passare alla canzone (file) precedente oppure il
pulsante NEXT per passare alla canzone (file) successiva.
); viene avviata la riproduzione della
Ruotare gradualmente il controllo del volume di uscita verso destra per regolare
il volume ad un livello di ascolto soddisfacente.
* Il nome della canzone visualizzato sul display è il nome del file. Non corrisponde al ID3 tag
all’interno del file MP3.
Italiano
3
Premere il pulsante PLAY dell’R-1 (
canzone (file) visualizzata sul display.
* I nomi delle canzoni sono visualizzati in ordine alfabetico in base al seguente elenco di
caratteri; non sono visualizzati nell’ordine cronologico di registrazione.
(spazio) ! # $ % & ‘ ( ) + , - . 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ; = @
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz
* Se la scheda CompactFlash contiene subdirectory (cartelle), tutti i file a livello di root sono
visualizzati per primi, seguiti dai file nelle subdirectory (cartelle).
Español
2
Français
* Se il display indica No Song, la scheda CompactFlash non contiene alcun file che l’R-1 sia
in grado di riprodurre.
* I nomi dei file che iniziano per "." vengono ignorati e non sono visualizzati.
* I file con estensioni diverse da .mp3 e .wav vengono ignorati e non sono visualizzati.
Per maggiori informazioni sui file che l'R-1 è in grado di registrare e
riprodurre, fare riferimento alla sezione “Types of files that the R-1 can
handle” (p.28).
125
R-1_egfis1.book 126 ページ 2005年1月20日 木曜日 午前9時45分
Metodi di riproduzione
REPEAT A-B (Riproduzione ripetuta)
Questa funzione consente di specificare una parte della canzone durante la riproduzione, in modo
da riprodurla ripetutamente.
Procedura
1
Durante la riproduzione, premere
una volta il pulsante REPEAT
(
).
Quella posizione viene fissata come
inizio della ripetizione (punto A).
2
Song
A
Premere il pulsante REPEAT
ancora una volta. Quella posizione
viene fissata come termine della
ripetizione (punto B).
fig.repeat-a
A
B
A
B
Song
La parte specificata nelle fasi 1 e 2 (la
parte tra i punti A e B) viene
riprodotta ripetutamente.
Per annullare la riproduzione
ripetuta, premere di nuovo il
pulsante REPEAT.
Song
Note
* Se dopo avere specificato un punto A, si preme il pulsante STOP prima di specificare il punto
B, l’impostazione del punto A viene annullata.
* Se dopo avere specificato il punto A, si fa proseguire la riproduzione fino alla fine della canzone,
la riproduzione viene ripetuta dal punto A alla fine della canzone.
* Se si preme il pulsante STOP durante la riproduzione ripetuta, la riproduzione si arresta e le
impostazioni della parte ripetuta (A-B) vengono annullate.
Per annullare questa funzione
•
•
•
126
Dopo avere specificato i punti A e B, premere il pulsante REPEAT (
) per annullare
l’impostazione dei punti A e B.
Se dopo avere specificato un punto A si preme il pulsante STOP prima di specificare il
punto B, l’impostazione del punto A viene annullata.
Se si desidera arrestare la riproduzione e annullare le impostazioni di ripetizione, premere il
pulsante STOP. La riproduzione si arresta e le impostazioni di riproduzione ripetuta (punti A
e B) vengono annullate.
R-1_egfis1.book 127 ページ 2005年1月20日 木曜日 午前9時45分
Metodi di riproduzione
1/2 PLAY (Riproduzione a velocità dimezzata)
English
Di seguito sono riportate le istruzioni per effettuare la riproduzione a metà della
velocità normale.
Procedura
1
In fase inattiva o di riproduzione,
premere il pulsante SPEED.
Deutsch
La riga più bassa del display
visualizza la scritta 1/2 e la riproduzione viene eseguita a velocità dimezzata.
Se l’R-1 è in fase di riproduzione, la riproduzione rallenta.
Se l’R-1 è in fase inattiva, alla pressione del pulsante PLAY viene avviata la
riproduzione a velocità dimezzata.
* Questa funzione regola il tono della riproduzione a velocità dimezzata, in modo che rimanga
lo stesso del tono normale. Ciò potrebbe causare un effetto tremolante nella riproduzione;
non si tratta di un malfunzionamento.
Français
Per annullare questa funzione
Se la riproduzione a velocità dimezzata è attiva, premere il pulsante SPEED per
annullarla.
Español
Italiano
Se la riproduzione a velocità dimezzata non viene annullata, anche la
canzone successiva viene riprodotta a velocità dimezzata.
127
R-1_egfis1.book 128 ページ 2005年1月20日 木曜日 午前9時45分
Metodi di riproduzione
PLAY MODE (Modalità riproduzione)
Di seguito sono riportate le istruzioni su come determinare l'ordine e il metodo di
riproduzione.
1
Premere il pulsante MENU.
Non è possibile cambiare la modalità di riproduzione durante la riproduzione
dell’R-1.
Come prima cosa è necessario premere il pulsante STOP per arrestare la
riproduzione.
2
3
4
Utilizzare il potenziometro VALUE per selezionare 05 Play Mode.
Premere il pulsante [ENTER].
Utilizzare il potenziometro VALUE per selezionare la modalità di riproduzione
desiderata.
Sequential
Single
Shuffle
Le canzoni sono riprodotte nell’ordine 001, 002, 003…009
* Utilizzare i pulsanti PREV e NEXT oppure il potenziometro VALUE per
selezionare un file (canzone).
Viene riprodotto ripetutamente solamente il file (canzone) selezionato.
L’ordine di riproduzione delle canzoni cambia automaticamente.
* Le canzoni riprodotte in precedenza non vengono riprodotte.
* Se si utilizzano i pulsanti PREV / NEXT oppure il potenziometro VALUE per
selezionare un file (canzone), i nomi dei file (canzoni) sono visualizzati nello
stesso ordine di quando viene selezionata la modalità di riproduzione
Sequential.
fig.sequential.eps
5
6
Dopo aver selezionato la modalità di
riproduzione desiderata, premere il
pulsante ENTER.
Premere il pulsante MENU.
Si torna quindi alla modalità di riproduzione.
128
R-1_egfis1.book 129 ページ 2005年1月20日 木曜日 午前9時45分
Utilizzo degli effetti
English
Applicazione di un effetto
Questa sezione descrive come applicare un effetto durante la riproduzione oppure
durante il modo standby di registrazione. È anche possibile effettuare l’impostazione
dell’effetto prima di iniziare la riproduzione oppure provare varie impostazioni
dell’effetto durante una registrazione di prova.
fig.effect.eps
Durante la
riproduzione In standby
di registrazione
Deutsch
Effect mode ON
3
1
2
Edit mode
EDIT
EXIT
ENTER
Français
Scegliere un effetto
01:Eazy EQ
-> 02:For Speech...
EXIT
ENTER
Selezionare un parametro
Type -> Level1
Italiano
EDIT
EXIT
ENTER
Español
Modificare il parametro
Pop -> Dance
-> HipHop...
EXIT
Uscire da Effect
Edit mode
Avviare
la riproduzione
/registrazione
Le impostazioni dei parametri dell'effetto eseguite sono effettive fino alla
modifica successiva.
129
R-1_egfis1.book 130 ページ 2005年1月20日 木曜日 午前9時45分
Impostazioni
Impostazioni del sistema (Setup mode)
Per ulteriori informazioni su queste impostazioni, consultare la sezione “Procedures”
(p.56).
* Durante la riproduzione o lo standby di registrazione, non è possibile entrare in Setup mode
premendo il pulsante MENU.
Menu/Effetto
01
02
03
04
05
Livello picchi distorti
Livello soglia
Procedura
1–5–10
A (p. 56)
OFF, ON, 5sec,
10sec, 20sec
A (p. 56)
––
B (p. 58)
––
C (p. 60)
Sequential,
Single, Shuffle
A (p. 56)
OFF, ON
A (p. 56)
A (p. 56)
A (p. 56)
Ridurre la distorsione
di clipping e passare
al convertitore AD
Livello AD
06
LCD Contrast
Regola il contrasto del display.
LCD Backlight
Specifica l’intervallo trascorso il quale la
retroilluminazione del display si spegne in
modalità batterie.
Delete File
Cancella un file.
Rename File
Modifica il nome di un file.
Play Mode
Specifica l’ordine di riproduzione delle canzoni.
Limiter
Attiva/disattiva il limiter del livello di ingresso.
* Il limiter diminuisce il livello di ingresso in
modo adeguato quando il livello di ingresso è
eccessivo.
Valore (valore
predefinito in
neretto)
Livello del segnale in ingresso
Il livello soglia è -9 dBFS.
07
Record Mode
Specifica il tipo di file creato in fase di
registrazione. Determina la qualità audio del file
registrato.
MP3 64kbps,
MP3 96kbps,
MP3 128kbps,
MP3 160kbps,
MP3 192kbps,
MP3 256kbps,
MP3 320kbps,
WAV 16bit,
WAV 24bit
08
Track Splitting
Attiva/disattiva la funzione Track splitting.
* Questa funzione divide automaticamente il file
quando c'è un intervallo di silenzio di tre
secondi o più durante la registrazione.
OFF, ON
130
R-1_egfis1.book 131 ページ 2005年1月20日 木曜日 午前9時45分
11
12
13
14
A (p. 56)
STEREO, MONO
A (p. 56)
OFF, 1min, 2min,
3min, 5min,
10min, 15min,
30min, 45min,
60min
A (p. 56)
–
D (p. 62)
–
E (p. 64)
–
A (p. 56)
Deutsch
OFF, ON
Français
10
Procedura
Italiano
09
Input Monitor
Attivare questa funzione se si desidera
monitorare il segnale in ingresso mediante le
cuffie. Disattivarla se non si desidera monitorare
il segnale.
* Durante la registrazione, il suono è udibile
indipendentemente dallo stato di questa
funzione.
Selezione ingresso
Impostare questa funzione su STEREO se si
collega un microfono stereo. Impostare questa
funzione su MONO se si collega un microfono
monofonico. Se si utilizza l’impostazione
STEREO con un segnale monofonico, viene
registrato solamente il canale L (sinistro). Se è
impostata su MONO, il suono viene registrato da
entrambi i canali L e R.
* Il file registrato sarà stereo anche se questa
funzione è impostata su MONO.
Sleep Timer
Specifica l’intervallo trascorso il quale l’R-1 entra
in Sleep mode in modalità batterie.
* Questa impostazione non produce alcun effetto
se si utilizza l’adattatore AC.
Format Card
Formatta una scheda CompactFlash.
Firmware Ver1.00
Consente di verificare la versione del software
dell’R-1.
About the R-1
Visualizza informazioni sull’R-1.
Valore (valore
predefinito in
neretto)
Español
Menu/Effetto
English
Impostazioni
131
R-1_egfis1.book 132 ページ 2005年1月20日 木曜日 午前9時45分
Controles y conectores de la unidad R-1
fig.panel-1
1
2
14
3
4
5
15
6
7
8
16
9
10
11
12
1
13
Micrófono interno
Se trata de un micrófono estéreo incorporado en la unidad R-1.
El usuario no puede utilizar el micrófono interno si un micrófono u otro dispositivo está
conectado a los jacks de entrada de micrófono 18 o a los jacks de entrada de línea 19 .
Si desea utilizar el micrófono interno, no conecte ningún dispositivo a los otros jacks de entrada.
Al grabar mediante el micrófono interno, ajuste el interruptor selector de tipo de micrófono a
DYN.
2
Pantalla
En la pantalla se muestra la información relativa al estado de funcionamiento de la unidad R-1.
3
Botón EFFECT (EFECTO)
Pulse el botón EFFECT (EFECTO) para activar y desactivar la función de efecto.
Cuando la función de efecto esté activa, este botón se encenderá en rojo.
Si activa esta función antes o durante la reproducción, el efecto se aplicará al sonido
reproducido en ese momento. Si activa esta función antes o durante la grabación, el efecto se
aplicará al sonido que entra en la unidad en ese momento, es decir, que se grabará el sonido
procesado con el efecto.
La unidad R-1 ofrece varios efectos que permiten al usuario modificar el sonido reproducido o
grabado, para que el sonido sea más impactante o la escucha más cómoda. También puede
transformar el sonido para que sea totalmente diferente.
4
Botón EDIT (EDITAR)
Utilice este botón para definir los parámetros del efecto.
Para obtener información sobre los efectos, consulte “Using effects” (pág. 46). Puede establecer
los parámetros del efecto independientemente de si el botón EFFECT (EFECTO) está activado
o desactivado.
5
Botón MENU (MENÚ)
Este botón activa el modo Setup (Configuración), en el que puede definir diversos parámetros
de la unidad R-1. En este modo puede ajustar el contraste de la pantalla de cristal líquido (LCD),
especificar la calidad de grabación y definir diversos parámetros generales de la unidad R-1. Si
desea obtener información detallada, consulte “Algunos parámetros” (pág. 150).
132
R-1_egfis1.book 133 ページ 2005年1月20日 木曜日 午前9時45分
Controles y conectores de la unidad R-1
6
Botón DISPLAY (PANTALLA)
7
English
Con este botón se cambia el contenido de la pantalla de la unidad R-1.
En el modo PLAY (REPRODUCCIÓN), pulse este botón repetidas veces para mostrar
sucesivamente el tiempo de reproducción, el tiempo de reproducción restante de la
canción (archivo), el tipo de canción (archivo) y la velocidad de bits.
Pulse el botón DISPLAY (PANTALLA) para cambiar el contenido de la pantalla.
Botón PREV (ANT)
8
Deutsch
Utilice este botón para desplazarse hasta el inicio de la canción o para seleccionar la
canción anterior.
Si pulsa este botón durante la reproducción de una canción, se desplazará hasta el inicio
de esa canción. Si ya se encuentra al principio (00:00) de la canción y pulsa este botón,
se desplazará hasta el inicio de la canción anterior. Para retroceder, pulse y mantenga
pulsado este botón.
Estas acciones están disponibles durante la reproducción y cuando ésta está detenida.
Botón NEXT (SIG)
Utilice este botón para seleccionar la canción siguiente. Para avanzar, pulse y mantenga
pulsado este botón.
Estas acciones están disponibles durante la reproducción y cuando ésta está detenida.
9
Botón REPEAT (REPETIR)
Français
Este botón permite al usuario reproducir repetidamente el fragmento de la canción
comprendido entre dos puntos (A - B) especificados por el usuario. Pulse este botón una
vez para marcar el punto A; a continuación, púlselo de nuevo para marcar el punto B.
Para cancelar la repetición de la reproducción, pulse de nuevo el botón REPEAT
(REPETIR). Si cancela la repetición de la reproducción, los puntos A y B marcados
también se cancelarán.
fig.repeat-a
1. Durante la reproducción, pulse el botón REPEAT
Song
A
Italiano
(REPETIR) una vez.
Ese punto constituirá el principio (punto A) del
fragmento de la reproducción repetida.
fig.repeat-b
2. Pulse de nuevo el botón REPEAT (REPETIR). Ese
A
B
A
B
Song
Español
punto constituirá el final (punto B) del fragmento
de la reproducción repetida.
fig.repeat-ab
Se repetirá la reproducción del fragmento
especificado en los pasos 1 y 2. Para cancelar la
repetición de la reproducción, pulse de nuevo el
botón REPEAT (REPETIR).
10
Song
Botón SPEED (VELOCIDAD)
Este botón ralentiza la reproducción (a la mitad de la velocidad). Púlselo de nuevo para
recuperar la velocidad normal. Esta función resulta útil si acompaña la música con un
instrumento y el tempo es demasiado rápido, o si escucha un discurso pronunciado
demasiado rápido.
133
R-1_egfis1.book 134 ページ 2005年1月20日 木曜日 午前9時45分
Controles y conectores de la unidad R-1
fig.panel-2
1
17
2
18
19
14
3
20
4
5
15
6
7
8
21
9
10
11
12
11
16
13
Botón STOP (DETENER)
Este botón detiene la reproducción o la grabación.
12
Botón PLAY/PAUSE (REPRODUCIR/PAUSA)
Este botón inicia la reproducción. Además, sirve para interrumpir la grabación o la
reproducción.
Si utiliza este botón durante la reproducción, ésta se interrumpirá y la pantalla de la unidad R1 mostrará el mensaje PLAY-PAUSE (REPRODUCCIÓN-PAUSA). Pulse de nuevo el botón
PLAY/PAUSE (REPRODUCIR/PAUSA) para reanudar la reproducción.
Del mismo modo, si pulsa este botón durante la grabación, ésta se interrumpirá. La pantalla de
la unidad R-1 mostrará el mensaje REC-PAUSE (GRABACIÓN-PAUSA) y el botón REC
(GRABAR) parpadeará en rojo.
Para reanudar la grabación a partir del estado de grabación interrumpida, pulse de nuevo el
botón REC (GRABAR), o pulse el botón PLAY/PAUSE (REPRODUCIR/PAUSA). El botón
REC (GRABAR) permanece encendido en rojo durante la grabación.
13
Botón REC (GRABAR)
Si la unidad R-1 está detenida y pulsa el botón REC (GRABAR), la unidad entrará en el modo
de grabación interrumpida. La pantalla de la unidad R-1 mostrará el mensaje REC STANDBY
(GRABACIÓN INTERRUMPIDA) y el botón REC (GRABAR) parpadeará en rojo.
Para iniciar la grabación a partir del estado de grabación interrumpida, pulse de nuevo el botón
REC (GRABAR), o pulse el botón PLAY/PAUSE (REPRODUCIR/PAUSA). Durante la
grabación, el botón REC (GRABAR) parpadeará en rojo.
14
Mando VALUE (VALOR)
Utilice este mando para seleccionar canciones, especificar tipos y valores de efecto y seleccionar
elementos del modo Setup (Configuración).
15
Botón EXIT (SALIR)
Utilice este botón para regresar al elemento anterior en el modo Effect Edit (Edición de efecto)
o Setup (Configuración). En el modo Setup (Configuración), los cambios realizados en los
valores se cancelan si pulsa el botón EXIT (SALIR) antes de pulsar el botón ENTER (INTRO).
16
Botón ENTER (INTRO)
Utilice este botón para seleccionar este elemento o aceptar un cambio realizado en el modo
Effect Edit (Edición de efecto) o Setup (Configuración).
134
R-1_egfis1.book 135 ページ 2005年1月20日 木曜日 午前9時45分
Controles y conectores de la unidad R-1
17
Jack de entrada de micrófono
Permite la conexión de un micrófono.
Si hay algún cable conectado al jack de entrada de línea, el sonido no saldrá a
través del jack de entrada de micrófono.
Jack de entrada de línea
Deutsch
18
English
Sitúe el interruptor de selección del tipo de micrófono 19 en la posición
adecuada, en función de si el micrófono conectado es un micrófono dinámico o un
micrófono condensador miniatura con enchufe para la red eléctrica.
Los micrófonos estéreos también son compatibles; para realizar la conexión, utilice un
cable estéreo mini. Si utiliza un micrófono monoaural, defina el parámetro del modo
Setup (Configuración) 10 Input Select (10 Selección de entrada) en MONO. Para
obtener información sobre este parámetro, consulte “Configuración del sistema
(modo Setup (Configuración))” (pág. 150).
Si desea dirigir la señal de audio de un dispositivo de audio o de un instrumento
musical electrónico a la unidad R-1, utilice un cable estéreo mini para conectar el
dispositivo a este jack.
19
Interruptor de selección del tipo de micrófono
Sitúe este interruptor en la posición adecuada, en función del tipo de micrófono
conectado al jack de entrada de micrófono 17 .
CND
20
Sitúe el interruptor en esta posición si ha conectado un micrófono dinámico.
Si usa el micrófono interno, ajústelo a DYN.
Sitúe el interruptor en esta posición si ha conectado un micrófono condensador
miniatura que requiere una fuente de alimentación. Debe utilizar un micrófono
“con enchufe para la red eléctrica”. Este jack proporciona un voltaje de 2 V.
* Si el interruptor se sitúa en la posición CND, no conecte ningún micrófono ni otro
dispositivo que no sea un micrófono “con enchufe para la red eléctrica”. Si lo hace,
pueden producirse daños en el micrófono o el dispositivo conectado.
Français
DYN
(DIN)
Volumen de entrada
Conector USB
Puede utilizar el cable USB proporcionado para conectar la unidad a su PC.
Si la unidad R-1 está conectada al PC, podrá transferir o copiar en el PC los archivos de
música que grabe. También puede transferir y copiar archivos MP3 y WAV del PC a la
unidad R-1, para poder reproducir los archivos en la unidad R-1.
Este conector es compatible con USB 2.0 (USB de alta velocidad), que permite la
transferencia rápida de archivos.
Si desea conectar la unidad R-1 al PC, consulte “Connecting the R-1 to your
computer” (pág. 44).
Una vez que el PC ha reconocido correctamente la unidad R-1, la pantalla de la unidad
R-1 muestra el mensaje Connected via USB (Conectado a través de USB).
Español
21
Italiano
Ajusta el volumen de entrada del sonido de los micrófonos incorporados 1 , el jack
de entrada de micrófono 17 o el jack de entrada de línea 18 .
Utilice el procedimiento descrito en “Ajuste del nivel de entrada” (pág. 140) para
ajustarlo mientras ve el nivel de entrada.
Mientras la unidad R-1 permanece conectada a un PC, todas las funciones de
la unidad R-1 (excepto el interruptor de alimentación) están desactivadas; por
tanto, la manipulación de los botones e interruptores de la unidad no tendrá
ningún efecto.
135
R-1_egfis1.book 136 ページ 2005年1月20日 木曜日 午前9時45分
Controles y conectores de la unidad R-1
fig.panel-3
1
22 23
22
24
25
26
27
28
Interruptor de alimentación
Este interruptor se utiliza para encender y apagar la unidad.
No apague la unidad durante la reproducción ni la grabación. Antes de apagar la
unidad, debe asegurarse de que la reproducción o la grabación se ha detenido.
• Si, de forma accidental, apaga la unidad durante la grabación, los datos no se
guardarán en la tarjeta CompactFlash.
• Pueden producirse daños en la tarjeta CompactFlash si apaga la unidad R-1 mientras
los datos se leen o escriben, por ejemplo, durante la reproducción y la grabación.
• Si apaga la unidad R-1 mientras se muestra el mensaje “Now working...”
(Funcionando...) durante la edición de efectos o mientras se guarda un parámetro
modificado, la unidad R-1 será inestable y es posible que no pueda iniciarse.
Tenga mucho cuidado de no apagar nunca la unidad mientras se encuentre en los
estados descritos.
23
Jack del adaptador de CA
Conecte el adaptador de CA proporcionado a este jack.
24
Interruptor HOLD (BLOQUEAR)
Si sitúa el interruptor HOLD (BLOQUEAR) en la posición ON (ACTIVAR), las
funciones de los botones de la unidad R-1 se desactivarán; esto resulta muy práctico
para evitar el funcionamiento accidental de la unidad R-1.
Sin embargo, incluso si el interruptor HOLD (BLOQUEAR) está en la posición ON
(ACTIVAR), el interruptor de selección del tipo de micrófono 19 , el volumen
de entrada 20 , el interruptor de alimentación 22 y el volumen de salida 25
continúan estando operativos.
25
Volumen de salida
Ajusta el volumen enviado desde el jack del auricular/salida de línea/salida
digital 26 . Sin embargo, el volumen de la salida digital no puede ajustarse.
26
Jack del auricular/salida de línea/salida digital
A través de este jack, sale el audio de la unidad R-1 hacia el auricular o los altavoces
externos. Si desea que salga una señal digital, utilice un cable digital óptico redondo
mini.
27
Botón de expulsión
Pulse este botón para expulsar la tarjeta CompactFlash insertada en la ranura de la
tarjeta de memoria 28 .
28
Ranura de la tarjeta de memoria
Inserte una tarjeta CompactFlash en esta ranura.
CompactFlash es el único tipo de tarjeta de memoria que puede utilizar en la unidad R1.
136
R-1_egfis1.book 137 ページ 2005年1月20日 木曜日 午前9時45分
Controles y conectores de la unidad R-1
English
fig.panel-4
Deutsch
29
30
29
Compartimento de las pilas
Cubierta de la ranura de la tarjeta de memoria
Italiano
Esta cubierta impide que la tarjeta CompactFlash se extraiga de forma accidental.
Cuando abra esta cubierta, verá la ranura de la tarjeta de memoria 28 y el botón
de expulsión 27 .
Español
30
Français
Si desea utilizar la unidad R-1 con pilas, instálelas aquí. Si está utilizando la unidad R1 con el adaptador de CA, no es preciso que instale pilas.
Antes de pasar del funcionamiento mediante el adaptador de CA al funcionamiento
mediante pilas o viceversa, debe apagar la unidad R-1.
Consulte “Installing the batteries and turning on the power” (pág. 20) antes de
utilizar la unidad R-1.
137
R-1_egfis1.book 138 ページ 2005年1月20日 木曜日 午前9時45分
Preparación para el uso de la unidad R-1
Formateado de una tarjeta CompactFlash
Debe formatear la tarjeta CompactFlash antes de utilizarla con la unidad R-1.
Es preciso utilizar la unidad R-1 para formatear la tarjeta CompactFlash. Siga el procedimiento
descrito en la página 150 de “Configuración del sistema (modo Setup (Configuración))”.
Es posible que las tarjetas CompactFlash formateadas con un dispositivo distinto a la unidad R1 no funcionen correctamente con la unidad R-1.
1
Apague la unidad R-1.
2
Inserte la tarjeta CompactFlash en la ranura de la tarjeta de memoria de la unidad R-1.
fig.startup.epsfig.no-song.eps
3
4
Encienda la unidad R-1.
Si la tarjeta CompactFlash no contiene
ninguna canción (archivo) que la
unidad R-1 pueda reproducir, la
pantalla mostrará el mensaje No Song
(Ninguna canción). Por el contrario, si
la tarjeta contiene canciones (archivos),
aparecerá la pantalla correspondiente
al modo de reproducción.
Pulse el botón MENU (MENÚ).
* Si decide cancelar el proceso, pulse el
botón EXIT (SALIR). Esto le
devolverá a la pantalla anterior.
fig.format-disp.eps
5
Gire el mando VALUE (VALOR)
para seleccionar 12 Format Card
(12 Formatear tarjeta).
6
Pulse el botón ENTER (INTRO).
fig.format.eps
7
Cuando aparezca esta pantalla,
pulse el botón ENTER (INTRO).
fig.sure.eps
8
La pantalla le solicitará que confirme si
realmente desea formatear la tarjeta.
Para formatear la tarjeta, pulse el
botón ENTER (INTRO).
* Si decide no formatear la tarjeta, pulse
el botón EXIT (SALIR). Volverá al paso 5.
No extraiga nunca la tarjeta CompactFlash mientras el formateado esté en curso. Si lo
hace, pueden producirse daños en la tarjeta CompactFlash.
fig.complete.eps
El formateado se completa cuando
aparece en la pantalla el mensaje
Completed! (Finalizado).
9
138
Pulse el botón MENU (MENÚ).
Esto le devolverá a la pantalla principal (modo reproducción).
R-1_egfis1.book 139 ページ 2005年1月20日 木曜日 午前9時45分
Métodos básicos de grabación
En la tabla siguiente se indican los tiempos aproximados de grabación que permiten las
tarjetas CompactFlash.
Duración de la grabación (aproximada)
WAV, 16 bits/44,1 kHz
MP3, 16 bits/320 kbps
MP3, 16 bits/256 kbps
MP3, 16 bits/192 kbps
MP3, 16 bits/160 kbps
MP3, 16 bits/128 kbps
MP3, 16 bits/96 kbps
MP3, 16 bits/64 kbps
Unidades: minutos
Tamaño de la tarjeta CompactFlash
64 MB
256 MB
512 MB
2 GB
15
31
125
3
23
47
188
5
102
208
831
26
128
260
1,039
32
170
346
1,386
43
205
416
1,663
52
256
520
2,079
65
341
693
2,772
86
512
1,040
4,158
130
Deutsch
Tipo de archivo
WAV, 24 bits/44,1 kHz
English
Duración de la grabación de una tarjeta CompactFlash
* Utilice la unidad R-1 para formatear la tarjeta CompactFlash.
* Si se dispone a grabar de forma continua durante un periodo de tiempo prolongado, utilice el
adaptador de CA proporcionado.
* Si desea grabar varios archivos, el tiempo total de grabación real será inferior al indicado en la tabla.
Français
* Las duraciones de la grabación enumeradas son aproximadas. La duración real de la grabación puede
variar ligeramente con respecto a la indicada en esta tabla; por este motivo, es conveniente incluir
cierto margen en los planes de grabación.
Grabación con el micrófono interno
El micrófono interno de la unidad R-1 es estéreo. Los
datos de audio que entran a través del micrófono
situado en el lateral derecho de la unidad R-1 se graban
en el canal derecho (R); por su parte, los datos de audio
recogidos por el micrófono situado en el lateral
izquierdo se graban en el canal izquierdo (L).
L
Italiano
fig.mic-LR.eps
R
1
Español
Si desea utilizar el micrófono interno, no
conecte ningún dispositivo al jack de entrada de
micrófono ni al jack de entrada de línea.
En caso de que haya un micrófono o un cable
conectado al jack de entrada de micrófono o al
jack de entrada de línea, estas entradas tendrán
prioridad y el micrófono interno no se utilizará.
Asegúrese de que la unidad R-1 está apagada. Asimismo, defina el volumen de
entrada en la posición mínima.
Si desea escuchar (controlar) el sonido a medida que se graba mediante el micrófono
interno, conecte un par de auriculares al jack de auriculares y utilícelos para controlar
la grabación. Si conecta altavoces externos con la intención de utilizarlos para controlar
la grabación, se producirá retorno acústico; por este motivo, no trate de controlar la
grabación mediante altavoces.
139
R-1_egfis1.book 140 ページ 2005年1月20日 木曜日 午前9時45分
Métodos básicos de grabación
2
3
4
5
fig.rec-1.eps
Encienda la unidad R-1 tal como se describe en “Connecting the AC adaptor and
turning on the power” (pág. 19).
Si graba mediante el micrófono interno, ajuste el interruptor selector de tipo de
micrófono a DYN.
Consulte “Types of files that the R-1 can handle” (pág. 28) y especifique el tipo
de archivo que desea grabar. Para realizar la selección o para comprobar la
selección actual, utilice el parámetro del modo Setup (Configuración) 07 Record
Mode (07 Modo de grabación) (pág. 150).
Ajuste el nivel de entrada del modo que se describe a continuación.
Ajuste del nivel de entrada
1. Pulse el botón REC (GRABAR).
La unidad R-1 entra en el modo
de grabación interrumpida. La
pantalla indica la cantidad de
tiempo restante que la unidad RTiempo de grabación restante
1 puede grabar para el tipo de
archivo (calidad de la grabación) seleccionado por el usuario.
* El nombre de la canción que se muestra en el modo de grabación interrumpida es el nombre
del archivo que se creará en primer lugar cuando finalice la grabación.
fig.rec-2.eps
2. Pulse el botón DISPLAY
(PANTALLA).
3. Emita (o realice) los sonidos que desea grabar y sitúe el micrófono interno de la unidad
R-1 donde pueda recoger el sonido.
* Si desea aplicar algún efecto al sonido a medida que lo graba, ajuste el nivel de entrada mientras
se activa el efecto (es decir, mientras se aplica).
fig.rec-3.eps
4. Mientras se emite el sonido,
aumente gradualmente el
volumen de entrada.
Ajuste el nivel de manera que los
indicadores del nivel de entrada
B
A
■ que aparecen en la pantalla no
alcancen el extremo derecho ■.
(Posición A en la ilustración de arriba)
Si el nivel de grabación es demasiado bajo, no podrá grabar sonidos muy tenues. Si el
nivel de la grabación es demasiado alto, los sonidos muy altos se distorsionarán, lo que
provocará crujidos en el sonido grabado.
* Si el material que se dispone a grabar contiene sonidos altos repentinos, como la entrada de un
tambor en una interpretación orquestal o una risa inesperada durante una conversación calmada, es
conveniente utilizar el limitador (06 Limiter (06 Limitador), pág. 150). Si lo utiliza, ajuste el nivel
de entrada de la forma adecuada al tipo de sonido predominante en la grabación (no la adecuada al
sonido alto repentino que aparece de forma ocasional). Al usar el limitador, el nivel de entrada se
ajusta automáticamente de manera que el nivel de entrada de audio no sea excesivamente alto. Al
usar el limitador, deberá ajustar el nivel de entrada de manera que el símbolo ■ en la posición B
en la ilustración aparezca sólo ocasionalmente.
140
R-1_egfis1.book 141 ページ 2005年1月20日 木曜日 午前9時45分
Métodos básicos de grabación
fig.rec-time.eps
6
Pulse el botón REC (GRABAR).
Tiempo transcurrido desde
el inicio de la grabación
7
Deutsch
Si mueve el control del volumen de entrada en el modo de grabación
interrumpida o durante la grabación, el nivel de entrada cambiará. Tenga
cuidado de no manipular el control del volumen de entrada sin darse
cuenta. Incluso si el interruptor HOLD (BLOQUEO) está en la posición ON
(ACTIVAR), el volumen de entrada no se ve afectado por la función HOLD
(BLOQUEO).
English
Se iniciará la grabación.
* Si lo prefiere, también puede iniciar la
grabación pulsando el botón PLAY/
PAUSE (REPRODUCIR/PAUSA).
Una vez que haya terminado de grabar, pulse el botón STOP (DETENER).
Si desea interrumpir la grabación, pulse el botón PLAY/PAUSE (REPRODUCIR/
PAUSA). Si desea cancelar la pausa y reanudar la grabación, pulse de nuevo el
botón PLAY/PAUSE (REPRODUCIR/PAUSA).
Français
Los datos grabados se guardarán como un archivo en la tarjeta CompactFlash. La
pantalla indicará el nombre del archivo que contiene los datos grabados, y el
archivo se seleccionará.
* El nombre de archivo se crea de forma automática, empleando el formato siguiente:
R1_0001.MP3. La parte del nombre 0001 corresponde al número que sigue a la
numeración de archivo más alta contenida en la tarjeta CompactFlash.
* El archivo se crea en el nivel raíz de la tarjeta CompactFlash. No se crean carpetas
(directorios).
Para oír los datos que acaba de grabar, pulse el botón PLAY/PAUSE
(REPRODUCIR/PAUSA). Si desea conocer otros métodos de reproducción,
consulte “Métodos de reproducción” (pág. 145).
Cómo el medidor de nivel de entrada indica el nivel de señal
Número de ■'s
Ninguno
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
∞
-50,0
-40,0
-36,0
-33,0
-30,0
-27,0
-24,0
dB
––
––
––
––
––
––
––
––
-50,0
-40,0
-36,0
-33,0
-30,0
-27,0
-24,0
-21,0
Número de ■'s
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
-21,0
-18,0
-15,0
-12,0
-9,0
-6,0
-3,0
0,0
dB
––
––
––
––
––
––
––
––
Español
8
Italiano
* Puesto que la unidad R-1 no dispone de reloj interno, todos los archivos tendrán la misma
fecha de creación (1 de enero de 2002).
-18,0
-15,0
-12,0
-9,0
-6,0
-3,0
0,0
(Clip)
141
R-1_egfis1.book 142 ページ 2005年1月20日 木曜日 午前9時45分
Métodos básicos de grabación
Grabación con un micrófono externo
La unidad R-1 puede utilizar micrófonos dinámicos y los micrófonos condensadores
miniatura con enchufe para la red eléctrica diseñados para conectarlos al jack de
grabación de un grabador MD (Mini Disc) o al jack de entrada de micrófono de un PC.
Si utiliza un micrófono condensador, debe utilizar uno con enchufe a la red
eléctrica. Si conecta el tipo erróneo de micrófono o un micrófono mini estéreo
convencional, pueden producirse daños en el equipo.
fig.conmic-LR.eps
L
R
MICRÓFONO
Micrófono estéreo
TIPO DE MICRÓFONO
NIVEL DE ENTRADA
1
Asegúrese de que la unidad R-1 está apagada. Defina el volumen de entrada en
la posición mínima.
Si hay algún dispositivo conectado al jack de entrada de línea, la unidad
omitirá la entrada a través del jack de entrada de micrófono. Si desea
grabar a través del jack de entrada de micrófono, no conecte ningún
dispositivo al jack de entrada de línea.
2
3
4
142
Encienda la unidad R-1 tal como se describe en “Connecting the AC adaptor and
turning on the power” (pág. 19).
Especifique el tipo de archivo que desea grabar, tal como se describe en “Types of
files that the R-1 can handle” (pág. 28). Puede utilizar el parámetro del modo
Setup (Configuración) 07 Record Mode (07 Modo de grabación) (pág. 150) para
especificar el parámetro que desee o para comprobar el parámetro actual.
Coloque el interruptor de selección del tipo de micrófono en la posición
correspondiente al tipo de micrófono que ha conectado al jack de entrada de
micrófono. -> “Interruptor de selección del tipo de micrófono” (pág. 135)
R-1_egfis1.book 143 ページ 2005年1月20日 木曜日 午前9時45分
5
6
Conecte el micrófono externo al jack de entrada de micrófono.
Si desea escuchar (controlar) el sonido a medida que se graba, conecte un par de
auriculares al jack de auriculares y utilícelos para controlar la grabación. Si conecta
altavoces externos con la intención de utilizarlos para controlar la grabación, se
producirá retorno acústico; por este motivo, no trate de controlar la grabación
mediante altavoces.
Ajuste el nivel de entrada del modo que se describe a continuación.
English
Métodos básicos de grabación
Ajuste del nivel de entrada
fig.rec-1.eps
La unidad R-1 entra en el modo
de grabación interrumpida. La
pantalla indica la cantidad de
Tiempo de grabación restante
tiempo restante que la unidad R1 puede grabar para el tipo de
archivo (calidad de la grabación) seleccionado por el usuario.
Deutsch
1. Pulse el botón REC (GRABAR).
Français
* El nombre de la canción que se muestra en el modo de grabación interrumpida es el nombre del
archivo que se creará en primer lugar cuando finalice la grabación.
fig.rec-2.eps
2. Pulse el botón DISPLAY
(PANTALLA).
3. Emita (o realice) los sonidos que desea grabar y sitúe el micrófono externo donde
pueda recoger el sonido.
4. Aumente de forma gradual el
volumen de entrada.
Ajuste el nivel de manera que los
indicadores del nivel de entrada
■ que aparecen en la pantalla no
B
A
alcancen el extremo derecho ■.
(Posición A en la ilustración de arriba)
Si el nivel de grabación es demasiado bajo, no podrá grabar sonidos muy tenues. Si el
nivel de la grabación es demasiado alto, los sonidos muy altos se distorsionarán, lo que
provocará crujidos en el sonido grabado.
* Si el material que se dispone a grabar contiene sonidos altos repentinos, como la entrada de un
tambor en una interpretación orquestal o una risa inesperada durante una conversación calmada,
es conveniente utilizar el limitador (06 Limiter (06 Limitador), pág. 150). Si lo utiliza, ajuste el
nivel de entrada de la forma adecuada al tipo de sonido predominante en la grabación (no la
adecuada al sonido alto repentino que aparece de forma ocasional).
Al usar el limitador, el nivel de entrada se ajusta automáticamente de manera que el nivel de entrada
de audio no sea excesivamente alto. Al usar el limitador, deberá ajustar el nivel de entrada de manera
que el símbolo ■ en la posición B en la ilustración aparezca sólo ocasionalmente.
143
Español
fig.rec-3.eps
Italiano
* Si desea aplicar algún efecto al sonido a medida que lo graba, ajuste el nivel de entrada mientras
se activa el efecto (es decir, mientras se aplica).
R-1_egfis1.book 144 ページ 2005年1月20日 木曜日 午前9時45分
Métodos básicos de grabación
fig.rec-time.eps
7
Pulse el botón REC (GRABAR).
Se iniciará la grabación.
* Si lo prefiere, también puede iniciar la
grabación pulsando el botón PLAY/
PAUSE (REPRODUCIR/PAUSA).
Tiempo transcurrido desde
el inicio de la grabación
Si mueve el control del volumen de entrada en el modo de grabación
interrumpida o durante la grabación, el nivel de entrada cambiará. Tenga
cuidado de no manipular el control del volumen de entrada sin darse
cuenta. Incluso si el interruptor HOLD (BLOQUEO) está en la posición ON
(ACTIVAR), el volumen de entrada no se ve afectado por la función HOLD
(BLOQUEO).
8
Una vez que haya terminado de grabar, pulse el botón STOP (DETENER).
Si desea interrumpir la grabación, pulse el botón PLAY/PAUSE (REPRODUCIR/
PAUSA). Si desea cancelar la pausa y reanudar la grabación, pulse de nuevo el
botón PLAY/PAUSE (REPRODUCIR/PAUSA).
Los datos grabados se guardarán como un archivo en la tarjeta CompactFlash. La
pantalla indicará el nombre del archivo que contiene los datos grabados, y el
archivo se seleccionará.
* El nombre de archivo se crea de forma automática, empleando el formato siguiente: R1_0001.MP3.
La parte del nombre 0001 corresponde al número que sigue a la numeración de archivo más alta
contenida en la tarjeta CompactFlash.
* El archivo se crea en el nivel raíz de la tarjeta CompactFlash. No se crean carpetas (directorios).
9
Para oír los datos que acaba de grabar, pulse el botón PLAY/PAUSE
(REPRODUCIR/PAUSA). Si desea conocer otros métodos de reproducción,
consulte “Métodos de reproducción” (pág. 145).
Cómo el medidor de nivel de entrada indica el nivel de señal
Número de ■'s
Ninguno
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
144
∞
-50,0
-40,0
-36,0
-33,0
-30,0
-27,0
-24,0
dB
––
––
––
––
––
––
––
––
-50,0
-40,0
-36,0
-33,0
-30,0
-27,0
-24,0
-21,0
Número de ■'s
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
-21,0
-18,0
-15,0
-12,0
-9,0
-6,0
-3,0
0,0
dB
––
––
––
––
––
––
––
––
-18,0
-15,0
-12,0
-9,0
-6,0
-3,0
0,0
(Clip)
R-1_egfis1.book 145 ページ 2005年1月20日 木曜日 午前9時45分
Métodos de reproducción
English
Reproducción normal
1
Deutsch
La unidad R-1 no dispone de altavoces internos. Para oír la reproducción, es preciso que
conecte un par de auriculares o altavoces.
Puede utilizar el jack de auriculares de la unidad R-1 como una salida digital (salida
digital) para conectar la unidad a un dispositivo de audio digital, o como una salida de
línea, para conectarla a un dispositivo de audio analógico.
Antes de continuar, realice las conexiones con el tipo de cable adecuado para el
dispositivo. Consulte “Connecting headphones” (pág. 22), “Connecting digital
speakers (digital devices)” (pág. 23) o “Connecting analog speakers (analog
devices)” (pág. 24).
Cuando la pantalla muestre el mensaje indicado en la ilustración, gire el mando
VALUE (VALOR) para seleccionar una canción (archivo).
Pulse el botón PREV (ANT) para desplazarse a la canción anterior (archivo), o el
botón NEXT (SIG) para desplazarse a la canción siguiente (archivo).
Gire lentamente el control del volumen de salida hacia la derecha para ajustar
el volumen y establecerlo en un nivel de audición agradable.
* El nombre de la canción que aparece en la pantalla es el nombre del archivo. No corresponde
a la etiqueta ID3 contenida en el archivo MP3.
Italiano
3
Pulse el botón PLAY (REPRODUCIR) (
); a continuación, se inicia la
reproducción de la canción (archivo) indicada en la pantalla.
* Los nombres de las canciones se muestran en orden alfabético, según la siguiente lista de
caracteres; no se muestran en el orden en que fueron grabadas.
(espacio) ! # $ % & ‘ ( ) + , - . 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ; = @
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz
* Si la tarjeta CompactFlash contiene subdirectorios (carpetas), todos los archivos guardados
en el nivel raíz se mostrarán en primer lugar, seguidos de los archivos guardados en los
subdirectorios (carpetas).
Español
2
Français
* Si la pantalla indica No Song (Ninguna canción), esto significa que la tarjeta CompactFlash
no contiene ningún archivo que la unidad R-1 pueda reproducir.
* La unidad ignora los nombres de archivo que empiezan con un punto (“.”) y no los incluye
en la lista.
* La unidad ignora los archivos que tienen una extensión diferente a .mp3 o .wav y no los
incluye en la lista.
Si desea obtener más información acerca de los archivos que la unidad R-1
puede grabar y reproducir, consulte “Types of files that the R-1 can
handle” (pág. 28).
145
R-1_egfis1.book 146 ページ 2005年1月20日 木曜日 午前9時45分
Métodos de reproducción
REPETICIÓN A-B (repetición de la reproducción)
Esta función permite al usuario especificar un fragmento de la canción durante la reproducción de
ésta a fin de reproducirlo repetidamente.
Procedimiento
1
Durante la reproducción, pulse el
botón REPEAT (REPETIR) (
)
una vez.
Ese punto se determinará como el
principio de la repetición (punto A).
2
Song
A
Pulse de nuevo el botón REPEAT
(REPETIR). Ese punto se
determinará como el final de la
repetición (punto B).
fig.repeat-a
A
B
A
B
Song
El fragmento especificado en los
pasos 1 y 2 (es decir, el fragmento
entre los puntos A y B) se
reproducirá repetidamente.
Para cancelar la repetición de la
reproducción, pulse de nuevo el
botón REPEAT (REPETIR).
Song
Notas
* Si después de especificar el punto A pulsa el botón STOP (DETENER) antes de especificar
el punto B, se cancelará la definición del punto A.
* Si una vez especificado el punto A continúa la reproducción hasta el final de la canción, se
repetirá la reproducción del fragmento comprendido entre el punto A y el final de la canción.
* Si pulsa el botón STOP (DETENER) durante la repetición de la reproducción, la
reproducción se detendrá y la definición del fragmento que debe repetirse (A-B) se cancelará.
Para cancelar esta función
•
•
•
146
Si una vez especificados los puntos A y B pulsa el botón REPEAT (REPETIR) (
), se
cancelará la definición de los puntos A y B.
Si después de especificar el punto A pulsa el botón STOP (DETENER) antes de
especificar el punto B, se cancelará la definición del punto A.
Si además de cancelar la definición de la repetición desea detener la reproducción, pulse el
botón STOP (DETENER). La reproducción se detendrá y la definición de la repetición de la
reproducción (puntos A y B) también se cancelará.
R-1_egfis1.book 147 ページ 2005年1月20日 木曜日 午前9時45分
Métodos de reproducción
REPRODUCCIÓN 1/2
(reproducción a la mitad de velocidad)
English
A continuación se describe cómo reproducir a la mitad de la velocidad normal.
Procedimiento
1
Mientras la unidad esté detenida o
durante la reproducción, pulse el
botón SPEED (VELOCIDAD).
Deutsch
La línea inferior de la pantalla indicará 1/2, y el sonido se reproducirá a la mitad de
la velocidad normal.
Si la unidad R-1 está reproduciendo en ese momento, la reproducción se ralentizará.
Si la unidad R-1 está detenida en ese momento, la reproducción a la mitad de la
velocidad normal se iniciará cuando pulse el botón PLAY (REPRODUCIR).
Français
* Esta función ajusta el tono de la reproducción a la mitad de velocidad de manera que el
sonido conserva el tono de la reproducción normal. Esto puede producir un efecto de
ondulación en la reproducción que en ningún caso puede considerarse un problema de
funcionamiento.
Para cancelar esta función
Si la función de reproducción a la mitad de velocidad está activa, pulse el botón
SPEED para cancelarla.
Español
Italiano
Si no cancela la función de reproducción a la mitad de velocidad, la
siguiente canción también se reproducirá a la mitad de velocidad.
147
R-1_egfis1.book 148 ページ 2005年1月20日 木曜日 午前9時45分
Métodos de reproducción
PLAY MODE (Modo de reproducción)
En este modo puede especificar el orden y el método de reproducción.
1
Pulse el botón MENU (MENÚ).
Si lo desea, puede cambiar el modo de reproducción durante la reproducción con la
unidad R-1.
En primer lugar pulse el botón STOP (DETENER) para detener la reproducción.
2
3
4
A continuación, utilice el mando VALUE (VALOR) para seleccionar 05 Play Mode
(05 Modo de reproducción).
Pulse el botón ENTER (INTRO).
Utilice el mando VALUE(VALOR) para seleccionar el modo de reproducción que
desee.
Sequential
(Secuencial)
Single
(Único)
Shuffle
(Aleatorio)
Las canciones se reproducirán en el orden: 001, 002, 003... 009
* Utilice los botones PREV (ANT) y NEXT (SIG) o el mando VALUE
(VALOR) para seleccionar un archivo (canción).
La unidad repetirá la reproducción del archivo (canción) seleccionado
únicamente.
El orden de reproducción de las canciones varía de forma automática.
* Las canciones reproducidas una vez no volverán a reproducirse.
* Si utiliza los botones PREV (ANT) y NEXT (SIG) o el mando VALUE
(VALOR) para seleccionar un archivo (canción), los nombres de los
archivos (canciones) aparecerán en el mismo orden que si se selecciona el
modo de reproducción Sequential (Secuencial).
fig.sequential.eps
5
6
Una vez que haya seleccionado el
modo de reproducción que desee,
pulse el botón ENTER (INTRO).
Pulse el botón MENU (MENÚ).
Volverá al modo de reproducción.
148
R-1_egfis1.book 149 ページ 2005年1月20日 木曜日 午前9時45分
Utilización de los efectos
English
Aplicación de un efecto
En esta sección se describe cómo aplicar un efecto durante la reproducción o mientras
la unidad se encuentra en el modo de grabación interrumpida. Si lo desea, también
puede definir parámetros del efecto antes de iniciar la reproducción o probar diferentes
parámetros del efecto a medida que realiza grabaciones de prueba.
fig.effect.eps
Durante la reproducción
en modo de grabación
interrumpida
3
1
2
Modo de edición
EDITAR
SALIR
Seleccione un efecto
01:Easy EQ (01:EQ fácil)
-> 02:For Speech...
(02:Discurso...)
SALIR
INTRO
Français
Deutsch
Modo de efecto ACTIVADO
Seleccione un parámetro
Tipo -> Nivel1
Italiano
EDITAR
SALIR
INTRO
Español
Edite el parámetro
Pop -> Dance
-> HipHop...
SALIR
Salga del modo
de edición del efecto
Inicie la reproducción
o grabación
La unidad memoriza los parámetros del efecto que defina hasta que los
modifique.
149
R-1_egfis1.book 150 ページ 2005年1月20日 木曜日 午前9時45分
Algunos parámetros
Configuración del sistema (modo Setup (Configuración))
Si desea obtener información detallada acerca de cómo definir los parámetros, consulte
“Procedures” (pág. 56).
* Durante la reproducción, la grabación y mientras la unidad se encuentra en el modo de
grabación interrumpida, puede activar el modo Setup (Configuración) pulsando el botón
MENU (MENÚ).
01
02
03
04
05
Menú/efecto
Valor
(predeterminado
en negrita)
Procedimi
ento
LCD Contrast (Contraste de LCD)
Ajusta el contraste de la pantalla.
1–5–10
A (pág. 56)
LCD Backlight (Luz de fondo de LCD)
Especifica el tiempo que tiene que transcurrir
antes de que la luz de fondo de la pantalla se
apague (cuando la unidad funciona con pilas).
OFF
(DESACTIVADO),
ON (ACTIVADO),
5sec (5 seg.), 10sec
(10 seg), 20sec (20
seg)
A (pág. 56)
––
B (pág. 58)
––
C (pág. 60)
Sequential
(Secuencial),
Single (Único),
Shuffle (Aleatorio)
A (pág. 56)
OFF
(DESCATIVADO),
ON (ACTIVADO)
A (pág. 56)
MP3 64kbps,
MP3 96kbps,
MP3 128kbps,
MP3 160kbps,
MP3 192kbps,
MP3 256kbps,
MP3 320kbps,
WAV 16bit,
WAV 24bit
A (pág. 56)
Delete File (Eliminar archivo)
Elimina un archivo.
Rename File (Cambiar nombre al archivo)
Cambia el nombre de un archivo.
Play Mode (Modo de reproducción)
Especifica el orden en el que se reproducirán las
canciones.
Limiter (Limitador)
Activa y desactiva el limitador del nivel de
entrada.
* El limitador reduce el nivel de entrada de
manera apropiada cuando éste es excesivo.
Nivel de corte
Nivel umbral
Nivel de AD
06
Reducir el ruido
de corte y pasar
el convertidor de AD
Nivel de señal de entrada
El valor umbral es -9 dBFS.
07
150
Record Mode (Modo de grabación)
Especifica el tipo de archivo creado durante la
grabación. Determinará la calidad de audio del
archivo grabado.
R-1_egfis1.book 151 ページ 2005年1月20日 木曜日 午前9時45分
11
12
13
14
A (pág. 56)
OFF
(DESCATIVADO),
ON (ACTIVADO)
A (pág. 56)
STEREO
(ESTÉREO),
MONO
A (pág. 56)
OFF
(DESCATIVADO),
1min, 2min, 3min,
5min, 10min,
15min, 30min,
45min, 60min
A (pág. 56)
–
D (pág. 62)
–
E (pág. 64)
About the R-1 (Acerca de la unidad R-1)
Muestra información relativa a la unidad R-1.
–
A (pág. 56)
Deutsch
10
OFF
(DESCATIVADO),
ON (ACTIVADO)
Track Splitting (Separación de pistas)
Activa y desactiva la función de separación de
pistas.
* Esta función divide de forma automática el
archivo siempre que haya un intervalo de tres o
más segundos de silencio durante la grabación.
Input Monitor (Control de entrada)
Active esta función si desea controlar la señal de
entrada mediante auriculares. Desactívela si no
desea controlar la señal.
* Durante la grabación, el sonido se oirá tanto si
esta función está activada como si está
desactivada.
Input Select (Selección de entrada)
Defina esta función en STEREO (ESTÉREO) si ha
conectado un micrófono estéreo. Defina esta
función en MONO si ha conectado un micrófono
monoaural. Si utiliza el parámetro STEREO
(ESTÉREO) con una señal monoaural, sólo se
grabará el canal izquierdo (L). Si se define en
MONO, el sonido se grabará en ambos canales,
izquierdo y derecho (L y R).
* El archivo grabado será estéreo incluso si el
parámetro se define en MONO.
Sleep Timer (Temporizador de suspensión)
Especifica el tiempo que tiene que transcurrir
para que la unidad R-1 entre en el modo Sleep
(Suspensión) (cuando la unidad funciona con
pilas).
* Este parámetro no tiene efecto si utiliza el
adaptador de CA.
Format Card (Formatear tarjeta)
Formatea una tarjeta CompactFlash.
Firmware Ver1.00 (Firmware ver 1.00)
Permite comprobar la versión del programa de la
unidad R-1.
Français
09
Procedimi
ento
Italiano
08
Valor
(predeterminado
en negrita)
Español
Menú/efecto
English
Algunos parámetros
151
R-1_egfis1.book 152 ページ 2005年1月20日 木曜日 午前9時45分
Main specifications
Recorder Part
● Tracks
2 (stereo)
● Signal Processing
AD/DA conversion: 24 bits, 96 kHz
● Data Type
<For recording> * Stereo only
Format
Sampling Rate
Bit Rates
MPEG 1, Audio Layer 3 (MP3)
44.1 kHz
64/96/128/160/192/256/320 kbps
Format
Sampling Rate
Bit Depth
WAV
44.1 kHz
16/24 bits
<For playback> * All sampling frequencies are converted to 44.1 kHz for playback
Format
Sampling Rates
Bit Rates
Format
Sampling Rates
Bit Depth
MPEG 1, Audio Layer 3 (MP3)
8/11.025/16/22.05/24/32/44.1/48 kHz
8/16/24/32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/144/160/192/224/256/
320 kbps or VBR (Variable Bit Rate)
WAV
8/11.025/16/22.05/24/32/44.1/48 kHz
8/16/24 bits
● Memory Card
CompactFlash (supports 32 MB–2 GB)
Recordable times
File type
WAV, 24 bit/44.1 kHz
WAV, 16 bit/44.1 kHz
MP3, 16 bit/320 kbps
64 MB
3
5
26
MP3, 16 bit/256 kbps
MP3, 16 bit/192 kbps
MP3, 16 bit/160 kbps
MP3, 16 bit/128 kbps
MP3, 16 bit/ 96 kbps
MP3, 16 bit/ 64 kbps
32
43
52
65
86
130
Units: minutes
256 MB
15
23
102
128
170
512 MB
31
47
208
260
346
2 GB
125
188
831
1,039
1,386
205
256
341
512
416
520
693
1,040
1,663
2,079
2,772
4,158
* These recording times are approximate. Your actual results may vary somewhat.
* Use a CompactFlash card that has been formatted on the R-1.
* If more than one recorded file exists, the total recordable time will be less than this.
152
R-1_egfis1.book 153 ページ 2005年1月20日 木曜日 午前9時45分
Main specifications
Input and Output
Effects
● Audio Inputs
● Effect Types
Internal mic (stereo)
Mic input jack (stereo miniature phone
type, plug-in power supported)
Line input jack (stereo miniature phone
type)
* The mic input jack and line input jack
cannot be used simultaneously (line input
takes priority)
● Audio Outputs
Headphone jack (stereo miniature phone
type)
Digital output jack (optical miniature
phone type)
Line output jack (stereo miniature phone
type)
* Headphones, digital output, and line
output share the same jack
● Nominal Input Level
(adjustable)
-10 dBu (input level set to maximum)
● Input Impedance
Mic input:6.8 k ohms
Line input:100 k ohms
● Maximum Output Level
(adjustable)
9 dBu (output volume set to maximum)
● Recommended Load
Impedance
32 ohms
● Frequency Response
20 Hz–20 kHz
01: Easy EQ
02: For Speech
03: Voice Perform
04: Editable EQ
05: Noise Reducer
06: Hum Noise Cut
07: Reverb
08: Int-Mic Rec
09: Ext-Mic Rec
10: Mastering
11: Center Cancel
12: Tuner
13: Metronome
Others
● Display
20 characters, 2 lines (backlit LCD)
● Dimensions
99.3 (W) x 134 (D) x 30.2 (H) mm
● Weight
260 g
* With batteries and CompactFlash card
● Power Supply
AC Adaptor, Alkaline dry battery LR6
(AA) type x 2, or Nickel Hydrogen
battery (HR15/51) x 2
● Accessories
Owner’s manual
AC adaptor (PSB-6U)
CompactFlash (64 M bytes)
USB cable (Mini-B type)
Carrying case
● USB Interface
Mini-B type connector
* USB 1.1/2.0 mass storage device class
compatible
* In the interest of product improvement, the
specifications and/or appearance of this unit are
subject to change without prior notice.
153
R-1_egfis1.book 154 ページ 2005年1月20日 木曜日 午前9時45分
Index
A
AC adaptor ................................................................. 8, 19
AC adaptor jack .............................................................. 16
HOLD .............................................................................. 34
HOLD switch ......................................... 16, 31, 34, 37, 66
Hum Noise Cut ........................................................ 47, 50
I
B
batteries ..................................................................... 20–21
Battery compartment ..................................................... 17
battery compartment cover .......................................... 20
Battery life ....................................................................... 21
bit depth .......................................................................... 28
Bit Rate ............................................................................. 28
Bit rate ........................................................................ 28, 44
C
Carrying case .................................................................... 8
Center Cancel ........................................................... 48, 51
Clipping ........................................................................... 46
CND ................................................................................. 15
CompactFlash ................................................................. 25
CompactFlash card .............................................. 8, 27, 44
CompactFlash cards ...................................................... 29
Completed ....................................................................... 27
D
Delete File ........................................................................ 54
digital output jack .................................................... 16, 23
Display ............................................................................. 12
DISPLAY button .......................................... 13, 30, 33, 36
DYN ................................................................................. 15
dynamic microphone .................................................... 32
Input Monitor ................................................................ 54
Input Select ..................................................................... 55
Input volume .................................................................. 15
input volume ............................................................ 29, 35
input volume control ........................................ 31, 34, 37
Inserting .......................................................................... 26
internal ............................................................................ 29
Internal mic .................................................................... 12
internal mic ..................................................................... 67
internal microphone ...................................................... 29
Int-Mic Rec. .............................................................. 47, 50
L
LCD Backlight ................................................................ 54
LCD backlight ................................................................ 20
LCD Contrast ................................................................. 54
Limiter ............................................................................. 54
Line input jack ............................................................... 15
line input jack ........................................................... 35–36
line output jack ........................................................ 16, 24
M
Easy EQ ..................................................................... 47, 49
EDIT button .............................................................. 12, 53
Editable EQ ............................................................... 47, 49
EFFECT button ......................................................... 12, 53
Eject button ..................................................................... 16
eject button ...................................................................... 26
ENTER button ...................... 14, 43, 53, 57, 59, 61, 63, 65
EXIT button ....................................... 14, 53, 57, 59, 61, 63
external mic ..................................................................... 67
Ext-Mic Rec. .............................................................. 47, 50
Mastering .................................................................. 48, 50
memory ........................................................................... 26
memory card .................................................................. 25
Memory card slot .......................................................... 16
memory card slot ........................................................... 27
Memory card slot cover ................................................ 17
memory card slot cover ................................................ 26
MENU button .................................. 13, 43, 57, 59, 61, 63
Metronome ............................................................... 48, 51
Mic input jack ................................................................. 15
mic input jack ........................................................... 32–33
Mic type select switch ................................................... 15
mic type select switch ................................................... 32
miniature plug-in powered condenser microphones 32
MP3 .................................................................................. 28
F
N
factory settings ............................................................... 65
Firmware ......................................................................... 55
For Speech ................................................................. 47, 49
format .............................................................................. 27
Format Card .............................................................. 27, 55
NEXT button ...................................................... 13, 38, 61
No Card .................................................................... 44, 68
NO NAME ................................................................ 44–45
No Song .................................................................... 38, 59
Noise Reducer .......................................................... 47, 49
H
O
E
hardware devices ...........................................................
Headphone jack ..............................................................
headphone jack ...............................................................
headphones .....................................................................
154
45
16
22
22
Output volume .............................................................. 16
output volume ............................................................... 38
Owner’s manual .............................................................. 8
R-1_egfis1.book 155 ページ 2005年1月20日 木曜日 午前9時45分
Index
P
PAUSE button .............................................. 14, 31, 34, 37
PLAY button ............................... 14, 31, 34, 37–38, 42, 61
Play Mode ....................................................................... 54
Playback .......................................................................... 28
Power switch .................................................................. 16
power switch .................................................................. 19
PREV button ....................................................... 13, 38, 61
R
REC button .................................. 14, 30–31, 33–34, 36–37
Record Mode .................................................................. 54
Record Standby .............................................................. 31
Recording ........................................................................ 28
recording-standby .......................................................... 30
Recording-standby mode ............................................. 66
recording-standby mode ............................................... 67
remain .............................................................................. 66
Removing ........................................................................ 26
Rename File .................................................................... 54
REPEAT button ........................................................ 13, 40
Reverb ........................................................................ 47, 50
S
Safely Remove Hardware ............................................. 45
Sampling frequency ................................................. 28, 44
Sequential ........................................................................ 43
Shuffle .............................................................................. 43
Single ............................................................................... 43
Sleep Timer ..................................................................... 55
SPEED .............................................................................. 42
SPEED button ........................................................... 13, 42
stereo ................................................................................ 28
STOP ................................................................................ 37
STOP button ............................... 14, 31, 34, 37, 41, 43, 61
Stop Hardware Device .................................................. 45
T
Track Splitting ................................................................ 54
Tuner .......................................................................... 48, 51
U
USB 2.0 ............................................................................. 15
USB cable ..................................................................... 8, 44
USB connector ................................................................ 15
USB Mass Storage Device ............................................. 45
V
VALUE dial ................................. 14, 43, 53, 57, 59, 61, 63
VBR .................................................................................. 28
Voice Perform ........................................................... 47, 49
W
WAV ................................................................................ 28
155
R-1_egfis1.book 156 ページ 2005年1月20日 木曜日 午前9時45分
R-1_egfis1.book 157 ページ 2005年1月20日 木曜日 午前9時45分
R-1_egfis1.book 158 ページ 2005年1月20日 木曜日 午前9時45分
For the U.K.
IMPORTANT: THE WIRES IN THIS MAINS LEAD ARE COLOURED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE FOLLOWING CODE.
Used for instructions intended to alert
the user to the risk of death or severe
injury should the unit be used
improperly.
Used for instructions intended to alert
the user to the risk of injury or material
damage should the unit be used
improperly.
* Material damage refers
other adverse effects
respect to the home
furnishings, as well
animals or pets.
to damage or
caused with
and all its
to domestic
001
• Before using this unit, make sure to
read the instructions below, and the
Owner’s Manual.
..................................................................................................
002c
• Do not open (or modify in any way)
the unit or its AC adaptor.
..................................................................................................
003
• Do not attempt to repair the unit, or
replace parts within it (except when
this manual provides specific instructions directing you to do so). Refer all
servicing to your retailer, the nearest Roland
Service Center, or an authorized Roland
distributor, as listed on the “Information”
page.
..................................................................................................
004
• Never use or store the unit in places
that are:
• Subject to temperature extremes
(e.g., direct sunlight in an enclosed
vehicle, near a heating duct, on top
of heat-generating equipment); or are
• Damp (e.g., baths, washrooms, on wet
floors); or are
• Humid; or are
• Exposed to rain; or are
• Dusty; or are
• Subject to high levels of vibration.
..................................................................................................
2
The
symbol alerts the user to important instructions
or warnings.The specific meaning of the symbol is
determined by the design contained within the
triangle. In the case of the symbol at left, it is used for
general cautions, warnings, or alerts to danger.
The
symbol alerts the user to items that must never
be carried out (are forbidden). The specific thing that
must not be done is indicated by the design contained
within the circle. In the case of the symbol at left, it
means that the unit must never be disassembled.
The ● symbol alerts the user to things that must be
carried out. The specific thing that must be done is
indicated by the design contained within the circle. In
the case of the symbol at left, it means that the powercord plug must be unplugged from the outlet.
007
• Make sure you always have the unit
placed so it is level and sure to remain
stable. Never place it on stands that
could wobble, or on inclined surfaces.
..................................................................................................
008c
• Be sure to use only the AC adaptor
supplied with the unit. Also, make
sure the line voltage at the installation
matches the input voltage specified on the AC
adaptor’s body. Other AC adaptors may use a
different polarity, or be designed for a
different voltage, so their use could result in
damage, malfunction, or electric shock.
..................................................................................................
008e
• Use only the attached power-supply
cord. Also, the supplied power cord
must not be used with any other
device.
..................................................................................................
009
• Do not excessively twist or bend the
power cord, nor place heavy objects
on it. Doing so can damage the cord,
producing severed elements and short
circuits. Damaged cords are fire and shock
hazards!
..................................................................................................
BLUE:
NEUTRAL
BROWN: LIVE
As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying
the terminals in your plug, proceed as follows:
The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK.
The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED.
Under no circumstances must either of the above wires be connected to the earth terminal of a three pin plug.
For EU Countries
This product complies with the requirements of European Directive 89/336/EEC.
For the USA
FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION
RADIO FREQUENCY INTERFERENCE STATEMENT
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential
installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in
accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee
that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or
television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the
interference by one or more of the following measures:
– Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
– Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
– Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
– Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Unauthorized changes or modification to this system can void the users authority to operate this equipment.
This equipment requires shielded interface cables in order to meet FCC class B Limit.
For Canada
NOTICE
This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations.
AVIS
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du Règlement sur le matériel brouilleur du Canada.
For the USA
DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY
Compliance Information Statement
Model Name :
Type of Equipment :
Responsible Party :
Address :
Telephone :
R-1
WAVE/MP3 RECORDER
Edirol Corporation North America
425 Sequoia Drive, Suite 114, Bellingham, WA 98226
(360) 594-4276
Information
HONG KONG
BARBADOS
PERU
IRELAND
CYPRUS
Parsons Music Ltd.
8th Floor, Railway Plaza, 39
Chatham Road South, T.S.T,
Kowloon, HONG KONG
TEL: 2333 1863
A&B Music Supplies LTD
12 Webster Industrial Park
Wildey, St.Michael, Barbados
TEL: (246)430-1100
Audionet
Distribuciones Musicales SAC
Juan Fanning 530
Miraflores
Lima - Peru
TEL: (511) 4461388
Roland Ireland
G2 Calmount Park, Calmount
Avenue, Dublin 12
Republic of IRELAND
TEL: (01) 4294444
Radex Sound Equipment Ltd.
17, Diagorou Street, Nicosia,
CYPRUS
TEL: (022) 66-9426
EDIROL (Europe) Ltd.
Studio 3.4 114 Power Road
London W4 5PY
U. K.
TEL: +44 (0)20 8747 5949
FAX:+44 (0)20 8747 5948
http://www.edirol.com/europe
INDIA
Deutschland
TEL: 0700 33 47 65 20
France
TEL: 0810 000 371
Italia
TEL: 02 93778329
INDONESIA
U. S. A. / CANADA
EDIROL Corporation
North America
425 Sequoia Drive, Suite 114
Bellingham, WA 98226
U. S. A.
TEL: (360) 594-4273
FAX: (360) 594-4271
http://www.edirol.com/
Rivera Digitec (India) Pvt. Ltd.
409, Nirman Kendra
Mahalaxmi Flats Compound
Off. Dr. Edwin Moses Road,
Mumbai-400011, INDIA
TEL: (022) 2493 9051
PT Citra IntiRama
J1. Cideng Timur No. 15J-150
Jakarta Pusat
INDONESIA
TEL: (021) 6324170
KOREA
Cosmos Corporation
1461-9, Seocho-Dong,
Seocho Ku, Seoul, KOREA
TEL: (02) 3486-8855
MALAYSIA/
SINGAPORE
Roland Asia Pacific Sdn. Bhd.
45-1, Block C2, Jalan PJU 1/39,
Dataran Prima, 47301 Petaling
Jaya, Selangor, MALAYSIA
TEL: (03) 7805-3263
AFRICA
EGYPT
Al Fanny Trading Office
9, EBN Hagar A1 Askalany
Street,
ARD E1 Golf, Heliopolis,
Cairo 11341, EGYPT
TEL: 20-2-417-1828
REUNION
Maison FO - YAM Marcel
25 Rue Jules Hermann,
Chaudron - BP79 97 491
Ste Clotilde Cedex,
REUNION ISLAND
TEL: (0262) 218-429
SOUTH AFRICA
Paul Bothner(PTY)Ltd.
17 Werdmuller Centre,
Main Road, Claremont 7708
SOUTH AFRICA
TEL: (021) 674 4030
PHILIPPINES
G.A. Yupangco & Co. Inc.
339 Gil J. Puyat Avenue
Makati, Metro Manila 1200,
PHILIPPINES
TEL: (02) 899 9801
TAIWAN
ROLAND TAIWAN
ENTERPRISE CO., LTD.
Room 5, 9fl. No. 112 Chung
Shan N.Road Sec.2, Taipei,
TAIWAN, R.O.C.
TEL: (02) 2561 3339
THAILAND
Theera Music Co. , Ltd.
330 Verng NakornKasem, Soi
2, Bangkok 10100, THAILAND
TEL: (02) 2248821
VIETNAM
Saigon Music
Suite DP-8
40 Ba Huyen Thanh Quan
Street
Hochiminh City, VIETNAM
TEL: (08) 930-1969
ASIA
CHINA
Roland Shanghai Electronics
Co.,Ltd.
5F. No.1500 Pingliang Road
Shanghai 200090, CHINA
TEL: (021) 5580-0800
Roland Shanghai Electronics
Co.,Ltd.
(BEIJING OFFICE)
10F. No.18 3 Section Anhuaxili
Chaoyang District Beijing
100011 CHINA
TEL: (010) 6426-5050
Roland Shanghai Electronics
Co.,Ltd.
(GUANGZHOU OFFICE)
2/F., No.30 Si You Nan Er Jie
Yi Xiang, Wu Yang Xin Cheng,
Guangzhou 510600, CHINA
TEL: (020) 8736-0428
AUSTRALIA/
NEW ZEALAND
AUSTRALIA/
NEW ZEALAND
Roland Corporation
Australia Pty.,Ltd.
38 Campbell Avenue
Dee Why West. NSW 2099
AUSTRALIA
For Australia
Tel: (02) 9982 8266
For New Zealand
Tel: (09) 3098 715
CENTRAL/LATIN
AMERICA
ARGENTINA
Instrumentos Musicales S.A.
Av.Santa Fe 2055
(1123) Buenos Aires
ARGENTINA
TEL: (011) 4508-2700
BRAZIL
Roland Brasil Ltda.
Rua San Jose, 780 Sala B
Parque Industrial San Jose
Cotia - Sao Paulo - SP, BRAZIL
TEL: (011) 4615 5666
CHILE
Comercial Fancy II S.A.
Rut.: 96.919.420-1
Nataniel Cox #739, 4th Floor
Santiago - Centro, CHILE
TEL: (02) 688-9540
COLOMBIA
Centro Musical Ltda.
Cra 43 B No 25 A 41 Bododega 9
Medellin, Colombia
TEL: (574)3812529
CURACAO
Zeelandia Music Center Inc.
Orionweg 30
Curacao, Netherland Antilles
TEL:(305)5926866
TRINIDAD
AMR Ltd
Ground Floor
Maritime Plaza
Barataria Trinidad W.I.
TEL: (868)638 6385
URUGUAY
Todo Musica S.A.
Francisco Acuna de Figueroa 1771
C.P.: 11.800
Montevideo, URUGUAY
TEL: (02) 924-2335
VENEZUELA
Instrumentos Musicales
Allegro,C.A.
Av.las industrias edf.Guitar
import
#7 zona Industrial de Turumo
Caracas, Venezuela
TEL: (212) 244-1122
DOMINICAN REPUBLIC
Instrumentos Fernando Giraldez
Calle Proyecto Central No.3
Ens.La Esperilla
Santo Domingo,
Dominican Republic
TEL:(809) 683 0305
EUROPE
ITALY
Roland Italy S. p. A.
Viale delle Industrie 8,
20020 Arese, Milano, ITALY
TEL: (02) 937-78300
IRAN
MOCO INC.
No.41 Nike St., Dr.Shariyati Ave.,
Roberoye Cerahe Mirdamad
Tehran, IRAN
TEL: (021) 285-4169
NORWAY
ISRAEL
Roland Scandinavia Avd.
Kontor Norge
Lilleakerveien 2 Postboks 95
Lilleaker N-0216 Oslo
NORWAY
TEL: 2273 0074
Halilit P. Greenspoon & Sons
Ltd.
8 Retzif Ha’aliya Hashnya St.
Tel-Aviv-Yafo ISRAEL
TEL: (03) 6823666
POLAND
AMMAN Trading Agency
245 Prince Mohammad St.,
Amman 1118, JORDAN
TEL: (06) 464-1200
MX MUSIC SP.Z.O.O.
UL. Gibraltarska 4.
PL-03664 Warszawa POLAND
TEL: (022) 679 44 19
PORTUGAL
Roland Iberia, S.L.
Portugal Office
Cais das Pedras, 8/9-1 Dto
4050-465, Porto, PORTUGAL
TEL: 22 608 00 60
ROMANIA
JORDAN
KUWAIT
EASA HUSAIN AL-YOUSIFI
& SONS CO.
Abdullah Salem Street,
Safat, KUWAIT
TEL: 243-6399
LEBANON
FBS LINES
Piata Libertatii 1,
535500 Gheorgheni,
ROMANIA
TEL: (266) 364 609
Chahine S.A.L.
Gerge Zeidan St., Chahine
Bldg., Achrafieh, P.O.Box: 165857
Beirut, LEBANON
TEL: (01) 20-1441
RUSSIA
OMAN
BELGIUM/FRANCE/
HOLLAND/
LUXEMBOURG
MuTek
3-Bogatyrskaya Str. 1.k.l
107 564 Moscow, RUSSIA
TEL: (095) 169 5043
TALENTZ CENTRE L.L.C.
P.O. BOX 37, MUSCAT,
POSTAL CODE 113
TEL: 931-3705
SPAIN
QATAR
Roland Central Europe N.V.
Houtstraat 3, B-2260, Oevel
(Westerlo) BELGIUM
TEL: (014) 575811
Roland Iberia, S.L.
Paseo García Faria, 33-35
08005 Barcelona SPAIN
TEL: 93 493 91 00
Badie Studio & Stores
P.O. Box 62,
Doha, QATAR
TEL: 423554
HONDURAS
CZECH REP.
SWEDEN
SAUDI ARABIA
Almacen Pajaro Azul S.A. de C.V.
BO.Paz Barahona
3 Ave.11 Calle S.O
San Pedro Sula, Honduras
TEL: (504) 553-2029
K-AUDIO
Kardasovska 626.
CZ-198 00 Praha 9,
CZECH REP.
TEL: (2) 666 10529
Roland Scandinavia A/S
SWEDISH SALES OFFICE
Danvik Center 28, 2 tr.
S-131 30 Nacka SWEDEN
TEL: (0)8 702 00 20
aDawliah Universal
Electronics APL
Corniche Road, Aldossary
Bldg., 1st Floor, Alkhobar,
SAUDI ARABIA
MARTINIQUE
DENMARK
SWITZERLAND
Musique & Son
Z.I.Les Mangle
97232 Le Lamantin
Martinique F.W.I.
TEL: 596 596 426860
Roland Scandinavia A/S
Nordhavnsvej 7, Postbox 880,
DK-2100 Copenhagen
DENMARK
TEL: 3916 6200
Roland (Switzerland) AG
Landstrasse 5, Postfach,
CH-4452 Itingen,
SWITZERLAND
TEL: (061) 927-8383
P.O.Box 2154, Alkhobar 31952
SAUDI ARABIA
TEL: (03) 898 2081
FINLAND
UKRAINE
Roland Scandinavia As, Filial
Finland
Elannontie 5
FIN-01510 Vantaa, FINLAND
TEL: (0)9 68 24 020
TIC-TAC
Mira Str. 19/108
P.O. Box 180
295400 Munkachevo,
UKRAINE
TEL: (03131) 414-40
ECUADOR
Mas Musika
Rumichaca 822 y Zaruma
Guayaquil - Ecuador
TEL:(593-4)2302364
GUATEMALA
Casa Instrumental
Calzada Roosevelt 34-01,zona 11
Ciudad de Guatemala
Guatemala
TEL:(502) 599-2888
Gigamusic SARL
10 Rte De La Folie
97200 Fort De France
Martinique F.W.I.
TEL: 596 596 715222
MEXICO
Casa Veerkamp, s.a. de c.v.
Av. Toluca No. 323, Col. Olivar
de los Padres 01780 Mexico
D.F. MEXICO
TEL: (55) 5668-6699
NICARAGUA
Bansbach Instrumentos
Musicales Nicaragua
Altamira D'Este Calle Principal
de la Farmacia 5ta.Avenida
1 Cuadra al Lago.#503
Managua, Nicaragua
TEL: (505)277-2557
AUSTRIA
Roland Elektronische
Musikinstrumente HmbH.
Austrian Office
Eduard-Bodem-Gasse 8,
A-6020 Innsbruck, AUSTRIA
TEL: (0512) 26 44 260
GERMANY
Roland Elektronische
Musikinstrumente HmbH.
Oststrasse 96, 22844
Norderstedt, GERMANY
TEL: (040) 52 60090
GREECE
STOLLAS S.A.
Music Sound Light
155, New National Road
Patras 26442, GREECE
TEL: 2610 435400
HUNGARY
Roland East Europe Ltd.
Warehouse Area ‘DEPO’ Pf.83
H-2046 Torokbalint,
HUNGARY
SYRIA
Technical Light & Sound
Center
Rawda, Abdul Qader Jazairi St.
Bldg. No. 21, P.O.BOX 13520,
Damascus, SYRIA
TEL: (011) 223-5384
TURKEY
UNITED KINGDOM
Roland (U.K.) Ltd.
Atlantic Close, Swansea
Enterprise Park, SWANSEA
SA7 9FJ,
UNITED KINGDOM
TEL: (01792) 702701
MIDDLE EAST
Ant Muzik aletleri ithalat ve
ihracat Ltd Sti
Siraselviler Caddesi
Siraselviler Pasaji No:74/20
Taksim - Istanbul, TURKEY
TEL: (0212) 2449624
Owner’s Manual
EUROPE
When you need repair service, call your nearest EDIROL/Roland Service Center or authorized
EDIROL/Roland distributor in your country as shown below.
Owner’s Manual
Bedienungsanleitung
Mode d’emploi
Manuale d’uso
Manual del usuario
Before using this unit, carefully read the sections entitled:
“USING THE UNIT SAFELY” and “IMPORTANT NOTES” (p. 2;
p. 5). These sections provide important information concerning
the proper operation of the unit. Additionally, in order to feel
assured that you have gained a good grasp of every feature
provided by your new unit, Owner’s Manual should be read in
its entirety. The manual should be saved and kept on hand as a
convenient reference.
U.A.E.
Zak Electronics & Musical
Instruments Co. L.L.C.
Zabeel Road, Al Sherooq Bldg.,
No. 14, Grand Floor, Dubai,
U.A.E.
TEL: (04) 3360715
BAHRAIN
Moon Stores
No.16, Bab Al Bahrain Avenue,
P.O.Box 247, Manama 304,
State of BAHRAIN
TEL: 17 211 005
TEL: (23) 511011
As of January 15, 2005 (EDIROL-1)
Copyright © 2004 ROLAND CORPORATION
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced in
any form without the written permission of ROLAND CORPORATION.
03892123
’05-2-2N
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement